PJM Studios / Claude Skills Library

The Claude Skills Library

279 discrete, ready-to-copy operating skills for directing Claude on SEO, e-commerce/CMO marketing and short-form video work — each one a purpose, a trigger, required inputs, a method, decision rules, guardrails and a definition of done. Free to browse, search and copy. No signup.

How this works

Every skill follows the same seven-layer shape: a purpose, a trigger for when to run it, required inputs, an ordered method, IF/THEN decision rules, guardrails, and a checklist that defines when the output is done. Search or filter to find the one you need, click a card to flip it open, and use “Copy” to paste the full instruction straight into a Claude conversation.

Many skills expect a standing SEO_CONTEXT.md file — your business details, competitors, brand facts and positioning — so Claude isn’t asked to guess them each time. Fill in the template below once and keep it current.

Skills 201–279 extend the library beyond pure SEO: a 40-skill e-commerce/CMO marketing department, a 20-agent short-form video department, a set of skills adapted from an open-source Claude Code SEO plugin, and one output-style skill. Cards from a different source than the core 200 carry a source badge; where a newer skill covers the same ground as an existing one, its card names the original so you can run both and compare.

Skills 001–200: The Claude SEO Skills Library, an operating manual by Klaym AI.

Skills 201–240: adapted from the Claude E-com CMO Swipe File (Cosmoon Media), inspired by Thomas Read’s “The Ultimate Marketing Engine.”

Skills 241–260: adapted from The Short-Form Video Department by UGC Ninja.

Skills 261–278: adapted from the open-source claude-seo Claude Code plugin (MIT license) — a different source from the Klaym AI library, flagged for side-by-side comparison where they overlap.

Skill 279: adapted from ayghri/i-have-adhd (MIT license).

All adapted here for internal use.

SEO_CONTEXT.md template

Copy this once, fill it in, and save it as SEO_CONTEXT.md wherever you keep working files with Claude.

# SEO_CONTEXT.md

A one-time reference file. Fill it in once, keep it current, and point
Claude at it before running any skill below — most skills expect the
inputs here rather than asking you to repeat them every time.

## Business & ICP
- What we sell, and to whom:
- Core buyer problems (in their words, not ours):
- Priority markets and languages:

## Competitors
- Named competitors to track:
- Brands we are frequently compared against in AI answers:

## Brand facts (approved, source of truth)
- Legal / trading name:
- Founding details:
- Category we belong to:
- Product / service names:
- Claims we can substantiate (and claims we cannot):

## Positioning
- Approved positioning statement:
- Use cases we want to be known for:
- Use cases we do NOT want to be associated with:

## Priorities & constraints
- Current priority pages / clusters:
- Known seasonality:
- Escalation contacts (communications, legal):
- Team capacity for SEO work this cycle:

001

Crawl Budget Auditor

Technical SEO Click to open →
001

Crawl Budget Auditor

Purpose

Determines where crawl activity is being spent on [DOMAIN] and which URL classes are consuming requests without earning value.

Use when

Large sites (50k+ URLs), after a template change, or when new content takes weeks to be discovered.

Not for

Small brochure sites where crawl budget is not a constraint.

Inputs

  • Server log sample or crawl stats export for [DATE RANGE]
  • Full crawl export (URL, status, depth, indexability)
  • Sitemap URL list

Method

  1. Group every crawled URL into classes by path pattern and template.
  2. Calculate share of crawl requests per class against share of indexable, valuable URLs.
  3. Flag classes where crawl share exceeds value share by more than 2x.
  4. Separate waste caused by parameters, pagination, and redirects from genuine content.
  5. Rank remediation by requests reclaimed per unit of engineering effort.

Decision rules

  • IF a URL class is non-indexable and heavily crawled → THEN recommend blocking or removing the entry points that generate it
  • IF crawl share is concentrated on old but ranking content → THEN leave it alone and document why

Guardrails

  • Never state a crawl frequency you have not seen in the supplied data
  • Never recommend robots.txt blocking for URLs that carry backlinks or rankings
  • Do not assume crawl budget is the cause of an indexing problem without evidence

Output

A crawl allocation table by URL class plus a ranked waste-reduction list with expected requests reclaimed.

Definition of done

  • Every URL class in the export is assigned
  • Each recommendation names the exact pattern to change
  • Ranking and backlink exposure checked before any blocking advice
← Click to close
002

Robots Directive Reviewer

Technical SEO Click to open →
002

Robots Directive Reviewer

Purpose

Reviews robots.txt and meta robots directives for conflicts, over-blocking, and rules that no longer match the site structure.

Use when

Before a release, after a migration, or when indexing behaviour is unexplained.

Not for

Deciding what should rank — this skill only governs access and indexing directives.

Inputs

  • Current robots.txt file
  • Meta robots / X-Robots-Tag values from the crawl export
  • List of URL patterns that must stay indexable

Method

  1. Parse every robots.txt group and record which user agents each rule applies to.
  2. Test the protected URL patterns against the rules and list any that are blocked.
  3. Cross-check disallowed paths against meta robots values to find contradictions.
  4. Identify rules referencing paths that no longer exist.
  5. Produce a corrected file with a comment explaining each changed line.

Decision rules

  • IF a URL is disallowed in robots.txt but carries a noindex tag → THEN flag it: the noindex cannot be read while the URL is blocked
  • IF a rule blocks a directory containing indexable revenue pages → THEN mark it critical and stop for human confirmation

Guardrails

  • Never propose a robots.txt change without showing the before and after lines
  • Never block CSS or JS required for rendering
  • Do not assume a wildcard behaves identically across all crawlers

Output

A conflict table (rule, affected pattern, risk level) and a rewritten robots.txt with inline change comments.

Definition of done

  • Every protected pattern tested
  • Every conflict has a stated resolution
  • Rewritten file validated against the rule syntax
← Click to close
003

XML Sitemap Architect

Technical SEO Click to open →
003

XML Sitemap Architect

Purpose

Designs the sitemap structure for [DOMAIN]: how many files, split by what logic, and which URLs qualify for inclusion.

Use when

When sitemaps are missing, monolithic, or contain non-indexable URLs.

Not for

Diagnosing why an individual URL is not indexed.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with status code and indexability
  • Current sitemap files
  • Priority content types and templates

Method

  1. Define the inclusion rule: canonical, 200 status, indexable, and of standalone value.
  2. Split URLs into sitemap files by template or section so coverage issues stay diagnosable.
  3. List every URL currently included that fails the inclusion rule.
  4. Specify the index sitemap and lastmod policy tied to real content changes.
  5. Write the naming and update cadence for each file.

Decision rules

  • IF a section has more than 40,000 qualifying URLs → THEN split it further by subcategory or date
  • IF lastmod cannot be tied to a real content change → THEN recommend omitting the field rather than faking it

Guardrails

  • Never include redirected, canonicalised, or noindexed URLs
  • Never set lastmod to the generation date by default
  • Do not treat sitemap inclusion as a ranking signal

Output

A sitemap architecture spec: file list, inclusion rules, split logic, lastmod policy, and an exclusion list.

Definition of done

  • Inclusion rule stated explicitly
  • Every current sitemap URL classified as keep or remove
  • Split logic supports section-level diagnosis
← Click to close
004

Sitemap Coverage Reconciler

Technical SEO Click to open →
004

Sitemap Coverage Reconciler

Purpose

Compares three URL sets — sitemap, crawl, and indexed report — to find where discovery, crawling, and indexing diverge.

Use when

Monthly, and whenever indexed page counts move without a known cause.

Not for

Judging content quality — this skill reconciles sets, it does not evaluate pages.

Inputs

  • Sitemap URL list
  • Crawl export of internally linked URLs
  • Index coverage export for [DOMAIN]

Method

  1. Normalise all three lists (protocol, trailing slash, parameters) before comparison.
  2. Build the four segments: in sitemap only, in crawl only, in both but not indexed, and indexed but in neither.
  3. Sample each segment and identify the mechanical cause per group.
  4. Attach a likely fix owner (content, engineering, or configuration) to each cause.
  5. Report segment sizes and the top three causes by volume.

Decision rules

  • IF URLs are indexed but absent from the sitemap and the crawl → THEN investigate orphan status and external discovery before removing anything
  • IF URLs are in the sitemap but never crawled → THEN check internal link entry points before assuming a crawl budget issue

Guardrails

  • Never estimate index coverage numbers that were not supplied
  • Never delete URLs from a sitemap solely because they are not yet indexed
  • Do not compare unnormalised URL strings

Output

A four-segment reconciliation table with counts, sampled examples, causes, and owners.

Definition of done

  • All three lists normalised identically
  • Every segment has at least three sampled examples
  • Causes are mechanical, not speculative
← Click to close
005

Canonical Conflict Scanner

Technical SEO Click to open →
005

Canonical Conflict Scanner

Purpose

Finds canonical tags that contradict other signals: internal links, sitemaps, redirects, hreflang, or pagination.

Use when

After template changes, on faceted or parameterised sites, and before any migration.

Not for

Choosing which of two competing pages should win — use the cannibalisation skills for that.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with canonical target per URL
  • Sitemap URL list
  • Redirect map if one exists

Method

  1. Classify every URL as self-canonical, cross-canonical, or missing a canonical.
  2. For cross-canonical URLs, verify the target returns 200 and is itself self-canonical.
  3. Flag canonical targets that are redirected, noindexed, or absent from the sitemap.
  4. Detect canonical chains and loops.
  5. Group conflicts by template so fixes are made once at the source.

Decision rules

  • IF a canonical points to a redirecting URL → THEN recommend pointing it at the final destination
  • IF paginated pages canonicalise to page one → THEN flag it as content loss unless the deep items are reachable elsewhere

Guardrails

  • Never change a canonical on a page ranking in the top three without explicit approval
  • Never assume a canonical is honoured — treat it as a hint, not a directive
  • Do not recommend canonicals between pages with materially different content

Output

A conflict register grouped by template, with the current target, correct target, and risk note per group.

Definition of done

  • Every non-self-canonical URL verified
  • Chains and loops listed separately
  • Fixes expressed at template level
← Click to close
006

Redirect Chain Reviewer

Technical SEO Click to open →
006

Redirect Chain Reviewer

Purpose

Maps redirect chains, loops, and mixed-status hops, then produces a flattened redirect map.

Use when

After migrations, domain changes, or whenever hop counts grow over time.

Not for

Deciding whether a page should exist — this skill only handles routing.

Inputs

  • Redirect export (source, target, status code)
  • Crawl export of internal links pointing at redirected URLs
  • List of URLs with external backlinks if available

Method

  1. Trace each source to its final destination and record hop count and status types.
  2. Flag chains over two hops, loops, and any 302 used for a permanent move.
  3. Identify internal links still pointing at a redirected source.
  4. Produce the flattened map: original source directly to final 200 destination.
  5. Separate redirects that should be removed entirely from those that must be preserved for backlink equity.

Decision rules

  • IF a chain ends on a 404 or a soft 404 → THEN flag it as broken and propose the nearest relevant live destination
  • IF a redirect source has external backlinks → THEN keep the redirect permanently even if internal links are fixed

Guardrails

  • Never remove a redirect that receives external links
  • Never redirect to a page with no topical relationship to the source
  • Do not mass-redirect deleted pages to the homepage

Output

A flattened redirect map plus two lists: internal links to update and redirects safe to retire.

Definition of done

  • Every chain resolved to a final status
  • Backlink exposure checked before retirement
  • Internal link update list is specific to URL
← Click to close
007

Status Code Auditor

Technical SEO Click to open →
007

Status Code Auditor

Purpose

Classifies every non-200 response by cause and business impact, and assigns a resolution path.

Use when

Weekly on large sites, or after any deployment.

Not for

Judging content quality on pages that respond correctly.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with status codes
  • Internal link source list per broken URL
  • Traffic or impression data per URL if available

Method

  1. Group responses into 3xx, 4xx, 5xx and soft 404 behaviour.
  2. For each 4xx, identify how the URL is still being discovered (internal link, sitemap, external link).
  3. Prioritise by inbound internal links and prior search demand.
  4. Escalate all 5xx responses as an availability issue before any SEO recommendation.
  5. Assign each URL one of four paths: fix, redirect, remove entry points, or leave to expire.

Decision rules

  • IF a 404 has external links or prior search demand → THEN recommend a redirect to the closest live equivalent
  • IF a 404 has no links and no demand → THEN recommend removing the entry point rather than adding a redirect

Guardrails

  • Never invent traffic history for a broken URL
  • Never redirect purely to make a report look clean
  • Do not treat intentional 410 responses as errors

Output

A prioritised status code register with cause, discovery source, and assigned resolution path.

Definition of done

  • All 5xx escalated first
  • Every 4xx has a discovery source
  • Resolution path is one of the four defined options
← Click to close
008

Index Bloat Cleaner

Technical SEO Click to open →
008

Index Bloat Cleaner

Purpose

Identifies indexed URLs that provide no search value and specifies how each should be removed from the index.

Use when

When indexed URL count far exceeds the number of pages that should rank.

Not for

Removing underperforming but strategically important content.

Inputs

  • Index coverage export
  • Crawl export with template classification
  • Impression or click data per URL for [DATE RANGE]

Method

  1. Classify indexed URLs by template and identify machine-generated classes.
  2. For each class, check impressions, clicks, and internal link volume.
  3. Separate zero-value classes from low-value-but-earning classes.
  4. Choose the correct removal mechanism per class: noindex, canonical, 410, or blocked entry points.
  5. Sequence the changes so removals happen before access is blocked.

Decision rules

  • IF a URL class has zero impressions and zero backlinks over 90 days → THEN recommend noindex, then removal of internal entry points
  • IF a class has small but consistent long-tail impressions → THEN keep it and improve it instead of removing it

Guardrails

  • Never block a URL in robots.txt before its noindex has been processed
  • Never remove URLs with backlinks without a redirect plan
  • Do not assume low clicks means zero value without checking impressions and assisted paths

Output

A removal plan by URL class: mechanism, sequence, expected index reduction, and rollback note.

Definition of done

  • Every class has evidence attached
  • Mechanism and order specified
  • Rollback path documented
← Click to close
009

Indexability Rule Mapper

Technical SEO Click to open →
009

Indexability Rule Mapper

Purpose

Documents the site's indexing rules as a single reference: which templates are indexable, which are not, and why.

Use when

Once per site, then updated whenever a new template ships.

Not for

One-off debugging of a single URL.

Inputs

  • Template inventory
  • Current directives per template
  • Business rules on what must never be indexed

Method

  1. List every template and its current indexability state.
  2. Record the mechanism enforcing that state and where it lives in the stack.
  3. Mark templates where the intended state and the actual state differ.
  4. Define the required state for each template with a one-line justification.
  5. Write the rule set in a form engineering can implement and test.

Decision rules

  • IF intended and actual states differ → THEN raise a defect with the exact enforcing mechanism named
  • IF a template has no defined intended state → THEN stop and request a decision rather than choosing one

Guardrails

  • Never guess the business intent behind an existing directive
  • Never document a rule you have not verified in the crawl data
  • Do not include page-level exceptions in a template-level document

Output

An indexability rule matrix: template, intended state, actual state, enforcing mechanism, and defect flag.

Definition of done

  • Every template covered
  • Each rule has a named mechanism
  • All mismatches raised as defects
← Click to close
010

JavaScript Rendering Tester

Technical SEO Click to open →
010

JavaScript Rendering Tester

Purpose

Compares raw HTML against rendered HTML to determine which SEO-critical elements depend on client-side execution.

Use when

On JS frameworks, single-page apps, or after a front-end rebuild.

Not for

Measuring page speed — use the Core Web Vitals skills for that.

Inputs

  • Raw HTML source for sample URLs per template
  • Rendered DOM output for the same URLs
  • List of SEO-critical elements to verify

Method

  1. For each template, compare raw and rendered output for title, headings, body copy, canonical, links, and structured data.
  2. Record every element present only after rendering.
  3. Check whether internal links exist as crawlable anchors in the raw HTML.
  4. Identify content behind interaction (tabs, accordions, infinite scroll) and whether it exists in the DOM.
  5. Rate each template as safe, at risk, or blocking.

Decision rules

  • IF primary body content appears only after rendering → THEN rate the template at risk and recommend server-side rendering for that content
  • IF navigation links are generated by script without anchors → THEN rate it blocking and specify anchor-based fallback links

Guardrails

  • Never conclude a page renders correctly from a screenshot alone
  • Never assume all crawlers execute JavaScript identically
  • Do not recommend a rendering strategy change without naming the affected elements

Output

A per-template rendering matrix with element-level presence in raw versus rendered HTML and a risk rating.

Definition of done

  • Every template sampled
  • All critical elements checked in both states
  • Risk ratings justified by named elements
← Click to close
011

Mobile Rendering Parity Checker

Technical SEO Click to open →
011

Mobile Rendering Parity Checker

Purpose

Verifies that the mobile experience contains the same indexable content, links, and metadata as the desktop version.

Use when

On separate mobile builds, adaptive templates, or after a responsive redesign.

Not for

Visual design review.

Inputs

  • Mobile and desktop HTML for the same sample URLs
  • Structured data output for both
  • List of templates with device-specific behaviour

Method

  1. Diff body content, headings, and internal links between the two versions.
  2. Compare titles, meta descriptions, canonicals, and hreflang values.
  3. Compare structured data blocks and their property values.
  4. Flag content hidden or removed on mobile that carries ranking value.
  5. Summarise parity gaps by template and severity.

Decision rules

  • IF mobile omits content that ranks on desktop → THEN flag it as a critical parity gap
  • IF content is collapsed but present in the mobile DOM → THEN record it as acceptable and note the interaction pattern

Guardrails

  • Never assume responsive design guarantees parity
  • Never compare pages captured at different dates
  • Do not treat layout differences as content differences

Output

A parity gap table by template: element, desktop state, mobile state, severity.

Definition of done

  • Both versions captured on the same date
  • All critical elements diffed
  • Severity assigned per gap
← Click to close
012

Duplicate Content Detector

Technical SEO Click to open →
012

Duplicate Content Detector

Purpose

Finds internal near-duplicate pages and determines whether each cluster needs consolidation, differentiation, or a canonical.

Use when

On large catalogues, location pages, or programmatically generated content.

Not for

Comparing your content against external sites.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with body text or content hashes
  • URL, title, and H1 per page
  • Performance data per URL if available

Method

  1. Cluster URLs by content similarity and by title/H1 similarity separately.
  2. For each cluster, identify the strongest performer using supplied performance data.
  3. Determine whether the pages serve different intents or the same one.
  4. Assign each cluster one action: consolidate, differentiate, canonicalise, or leave.
  5. Specify what unique content each retained page must gain.

Decision rules

  • IF pages are near-identical and target the same query → THEN recommend consolidation into the strongest performer
  • IF pages are similar but serve genuinely different intents → THEN recommend differentiation and keep both

Guardrails

  • Never consolidate pages without checking backlinks and current rankings
  • Never rely on title similarity alone to declare duplication
  • Do not delete duplicates — redirect or canonicalise them

Output

A duplicate cluster register: member URLs, similarity basis, chosen action, and the retained URL.

Definition of done

  • Every cluster has a named retained URL
  • Action justified by intent and performance
  • Backlink check recorded per cluster
← Click to close
013

Pagination Pattern Reviewer

Technical SEO Click to open →
013

Pagination Pattern Reviewer

Purpose

Audits how paginated series expose their items to crawlers and whether deep items remain reachable.

Use when

On blogs, catalogues, and archives with multi-page series.

Not for

Deciding how many items should appear per page from a UX standpoint.

Inputs

  • Sample paginated series URLs
  • Crawl export showing depth and discovery path for deep items
  • Current canonical and indexability of paginated pages

Method

  1. Map how page two onward is linked and whether links exist in raw HTML.
  2. Check whether items on deep pages have any other internal discovery path.
  3. Review canonical and indexability treatment across the series.
  4. Measure click depth of the deepest items.
  5. Recommend a pattern: indexable series, view-all, or improved category entry points.

Decision rules

  • IF deep items are only reachable through pagination beyond page five → THEN recommend additional entry points such as filtered hubs
  • IF paginated pages canonicalise to page one → THEN recommend self-canonical pages to preserve item discovery

Guardrails

  • Never noindex paginated pages while they remain the only discovery path
  • Never rely on infinite scroll without crawlable pagination links
  • Do not assume item pages are indexed because the series is

Output

A pagination pattern report per series with discovery depth, current treatment, and a recommended pattern.

Definition of done

  • Deepest item depth measured
  • Alternative discovery paths identified
  • Recommended pattern specified per series
← Click to close
014

Faceted Navigation Governor

Technical SEO Click to open →
014

Faceted Navigation Governor

Purpose

Defines which filter combinations may be crawled and indexed, and which must be blocked at the source.

Use when

On e-commerce or directory sites where filters generate URLs.

Not for

Designing the filter interface itself.

Inputs

  • List of facet parameters and their value counts
  • Sample generated URLs
  • Search demand evidence for facet combinations

Method

  1. Enumerate facets and calculate the theoretical URL space they create.
  2. Identify facet combinations with genuine external search demand.
  3. Define three tiers: indexable, crawlable but not indexed, and blocked.
  4. Specify the enforcement mechanism per tier and where it applies.
  5. Define how new facet values are handled by default.

Decision rules

  • IF a facet combination has demonstrated search demand → THEN promote it to indexable with a static, linkable URL
  • IF a facet combination exists only for on-site filtering → THEN keep it out of crawlable links entirely

Guardrails

  • Never open a facet to indexing without demand evidence
  • Never rely on canonical tags alone to control facet crawling
  • Do not block facets that are currently ranking without a migration plan

Output

A facet governance table: parameter, tier, mechanism, and default rule for new values.

Definition of done

  • Every facet assigned a tier
  • Demand evidence attached to indexable facets
  • Default rule for new values defined
← Click to close
015

Crawl Depth Optimizer

Technical SEO Click to open →
015

Crawl Depth Optimizer

Purpose

Reduces click depth for pages that carry business value but sit too far from the entry points.

Use when

When valuable pages are more than three clicks deep.

Not for

Choosing internal link anchors — the internal linking skills handle that.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with click depth per URL
  • Business value or revenue tier per page type
  • Current navigation and hub structure

Method

  1. Plot depth distribution and identify value-tier pages beyond depth three.
  2. Trace the shortest existing path to each deep page.
  3. Identify which hub, category, or navigation change would shorten it most.
  4. Group pages that can be lifted by the same structural change.
  5. Sequence changes by number of pages improved per change.

Decision rules

  • IF many valuable pages share one deep parent → THEN fix the parent's exposure instead of linking each page individually
  • IF a page is deep because it is low value → THEN leave the depth and record the decision

Guardrails

  • Never add navigation links purely to reduce depth numbers
  • Never flatten hierarchy in a way that breaks topical grouping
  • Do not treat depth as a ranking factor — treat it as a discovery and priority signal

Output

A depth reduction plan: structural change, pages improved, new expected depth, and effort estimate.

Definition of done

  • Value tier applied before prioritising
  • Changes grouped by shared parent
  • Expected new depth stated per group
← Click to close
016

Log File Crawl Analyzer

Technical SEO Click to open →
016

Log File Crawl Analyzer

Purpose

Turns raw server logs into a picture of how search crawlers actually behave on [DOMAIN].

Use when

Monthly on large sites, and after migrations or major structural changes.

Not for

Measuring user traffic or conversions.

Inputs

  • Server log file for [DATE RANGE]
  • Crawl export for URL classification
  • List of verified crawler user agents

Method

  1. Filter to verified search crawler requests and discard spoofed agents.
  2. Aggregate requests by URL class, status code, and day.
  3. Identify never-crawled indexable URLs and over-crawled low-value URLs.
  4. Detect crawl pattern breaks: sudden drops, spikes, or shifts between sections.
  5. Correlate pattern breaks with known deployment or content dates only when those dates are supplied.

Decision rules

  • IF indexable priority URLs show no crawl requests in the period → THEN investigate internal linking and sitemap inclusion first
  • IF crawl requests spike on error responses → THEN escalate as a server or configuration issue

Guardrails

  • Never treat unverified user agents as search crawlers
  • Never claim a correlation with a deployment without a supplied deployment date
  • Do not extrapolate crawl behaviour from a sample period shorter than 14 days

Output

A crawl behaviour report: class-level request distribution, uncrawled priority URLs, and pattern breaks with dates.

Definition of done

  • Crawler verification applied
  • Uncrawled priority list produced
  • Every pattern break has a date and observed magnitude
← Click to close
017

Core Web Vitals Triage

Technical SEO Click to open →
017

Core Web Vitals Triage

Purpose

Converts field and lab performance data into a small set of engineering fixes ranked by affected page volume.

Use when

Quarterly, or when field data shows a threshold breach on a key template.

Not for

Rewriting front-end code — this skill produces the diagnosis and the brief.

Inputs

  • Field data by URL group
  • Lab diagnostics for representative URLs
  • Template-to-URL mapping

Method

  1. Group URLs by template and attach field metrics to each group.
  2. For failing groups, identify the dominant contributing element from lab diagnostics.
  3. Determine whether the cause is template-level or content-level.
  4. Estimate how many URLs each fix would improve.
  5. Write one implementation brief per fix, ordered by URLs improved.

Decision rules

  • IF a metric fails on one template only → THEN treat it as a template defect and brief engineering on that template
  • IF failures follow specific content, such as heavy embeds → THEN treat it as an editorial rule, not an engineering fix

Guardrails

  • Never report lab data as if it were field data
  • Never promise ranking improvements from performance work
  • Do not aggregate metrics across templates with different layouts

Output

A triage table by template with failing metric, dominant cause, URLs affected, and a linked implementation brief.

Definition of done

  • Field and lab data kept separate
  • Cause named per failing template
  • Fixes ranked by URLs improved
← Click to close
018

Render-Blocking Resource Reviewer

Technical SEO Click to open →
018

Render-Blocking Resource Reviewer

Purpose

Identifies scripts, styles, and third-party tags delaying the first meaningful render, and proposes a loading policy.

Use when

When performance triage points to resource loading rather than layout or server time.

Not for

Deciding which marketing tags the business needs.

Inputs

  • Resource waterfall for representative URLs
  • Third-party tag inventory with owners
  • Template-to-URL mapping

Method

  1. List every blocking resource by size, origin, and position in the critical path.
  2. Separate first-party from third-party and note the owner of each tag.
  3. Classify each resource: required for render, deferrable, or removable.
  4. Quantify the render path saving per resource where the waterfall supports it.
  5. Produce a loading policy: what loads inline, deferred, async, or on interaction.

Decision rules

  • IF a third-party tag has no named owner → THEN flag it for removal review rather than optimisation
  • IF a resource is required for above-the-fold layout → THEN keep it blocking and optimise its size instead

Guardrails

  • Never recommend removing a tag without identifying its business function
  • Never defer resources that control above-the-fold layout
  • Do not present estimated savings as measured savings

Output

A resource policy table: resource, owner, classification, loading strategy, and expected effect.

Definition of done

  • Every blocking resource classified
  • Third-party owners identified or flagged
  • Loading strategy specified per resource
← Click to close
019

HTTPS & Mixed Content Auditor

Technical SEO Click to open →
019

HTTPS & Mixed Content Auditor

Purpose

Verifies protocol consistency across the site and finds insecure references that undermine it.

Use when

After migrations, CDN changes, or certificate renewals.

Not for

Certificate procurement or infrastructure configuration.

Inputs

  • Crawl export including resource URLs
  • Certificate details and expiry
  • List of subdomains in use

Method

  1. Confirm every indexable URL resolves over HTTPS with a valid certificate.
  2. Find pages loading insecure resources and record the resource origin.
  3. Check that HTTP versions redirect once, permanently, to the HTTPS equivalent.
  4. Verify canonicals, hreflang, and sitemap entries all use the secure protocol.
  5. List subdomains missing coverage and note certificate expiry dates.

Decision rules

  • IF a page loads insecure third-party resources → THEN identify the source template and fix it there
  • IF HTTP to HTTPS redirects pass through an intermediate hop → THEN recommend flattening to a single hop

Guardrails

  • Never assume a redirect exists without testing the HTTP version
  • Never report certificate validity without the supplied certificate data
  • Do not overlook subdomains and asset domains

Output

A protocol audit: insecure resource list by template, redirect behaviour, signal consistency, and certificate coverage.

Definition of done

  • All subdomains checked
  • Every insecure resource traced to a template
  • Redirect hop count recorded
← Click to close
020

Site Migration Validator

Technical SEO Click to open →
020

Site Migration Validator

Purpose

Provides the pre-launch and post-launch validation sequence for a migration, with hard stop conditions.

Use when

Before and after any domain change, replatform, or large-scale URL restructure.

Not for

Deciding whether to migrate — this skill validates execution.

Inputs

  • Old URL inventory with performance and backlink data
  • New URL inventory
  • Proposed redirect map and launch date

Method

  1. Verify every old URL with value maps to exactly one new URL, and list unmapped ones.
  2. Check the new environment for indexability, canonicals, hreflang, and structured data before launch.
  3. Define hard stop conditions that block launch if unmet.
  4. Specify the post-launch checks for day one, week one, and week four with what to measure.
  5. Define the rollback trigger and who owns the decision.

Decision rules

  • IF a high-value old URL has no mapped destination → THEN treat it as a hard stop until mapped
  • IF post-launch checks show sustained loss beyond the agreed threshold → THEN trigger the documented rollback review, not ad hoc fixes

Guardrails

  • Never launch with unmapped URLs that carry backlinks or rankings
  • Never compare post-launch performance across different date range lengths
  • Do not attribute every post-launch change to the migration without evidence

Output

A migration validation pack: mapping gaps, pre-launch checklist, hard stops, post-launch schedule, and rollback trigger.

Definition of done

  • Every valuable old URL mapped or explicitly retired
  • Hard stops agreed before launch
  • Post-launch measurement dates fixed in advance
← Click to close
021

Hreflang Consistency Checker

Technical SEO Click to open →
021

Hreflang Consistency Checker

Purpose

Validates international targeting annotations for reciprocity, coverage, and conflicts with canonicals.

Use when

On multi-language or multi-market sites, and after adding a market.

Not for

Deciding which markets to enter or which languages to translate.

Inputs

  • Hreflang annotations per URL
  • Market and language matrix
  • Canonical values per URL

Method

  1. Verify every annotation returns a reciprocal reference from its target.
  2. Check language and region codes against valid values.
  3. Confirm each annotated URL is self-referencing and self-canonical.
  4. Find market pages missing from the cluster and clusters missing an x-default.
  5. Group errors by cluster and template.

Decision rules

  • IF a target URL does not reference back → THEN flag the cluster as invalid rather than partially valid
  • IF hreflang points to a canonicalised URL → THEN flag the conflict and recommend annotating canonical URLs only

Guardrails

  • Never mix language-only and language-region codes inconsistently within a cluster
  • Never annotate URLs that are redirected or noindexed
  • Do not assume a missing market is an error without checking the market matrix

Output

A cluster validation report: cluster, missing reciprocals, invalid codes, canonical conflicts, and coverage gaps.

Definition of done

  • Reciprocity verified in both directions
  • Codes validated against the market matrix
  • Errors grouped by template
← Click to close
022

Structured Data Validity Auditor

Technical SEO Click to open →
022

Structured Data Validity Auditor

Purpose

Checks deployed structured data for syntax validity, required properties, and agreement with visible page content.

Use when

After template changes, and quarterly across key templates.

Not for

Choosing which new schema types to deploy — use the corresponding skill for that.

Inputs

  • Extracted structured data
  • Visible page content for the same URLs
  • List of deployed schema types

Method

  1. Validate syntax of every deployed structured data block (JSON-LD, microdata, RDFa).
  2. Check required and recommended properties for each schema type used.
  3. Verify the structured data agrees with the visible page content.
  4. Flag missing, invalid, or mismatched properties grouped by template.
  5. Produce a per-template fix list ordered by affected URL volume.

Decision rules

  • IF structured data describes content not visible on the page → THEN flag it as a mismatch and remove or correct it
  • IF a required property is missing across an entire template → THEN raise it as a template defect, not a page-by-page fix

Guardrails

  • Never recommend schema that does not match the page's actual content
  • Never mark a page valid from syntax alone without checking required properties
  • Do not report rich result status without Search Console evidence

Output

A structured data error register grouped by template: error type, affected URLs, required fix.

Definition of done

  • Every template with structured data sampled
  • Syntax, required properties and content agreement all checked
  • Errors grouped by template with fixes stated
← Click to close
023

Crawl Error Trend Monitor

Technical SEO Click to open →
023

Crawl Error Trend Monitor

Purpose

Tracks technical error classes over time so that structural regressions are separated from routine noise.

Use when

Weekly, using consecutive crawl or coverage exports.

Not for

Diagnosing a single URL's problem in depth.

Inputs

  • Current and previous crawl or coverage exports
  • Deployment log with dates if available
  • Error class definitions used previously

Method

  1. Normalise both exports and compute error counts per class and per template.
  2. Calculate period-over-period change and flag classes exceeding the agreed variance band.
  3. Identify new error classes not present in the prior period.
  4. Check whether flagged changes concentrate in one template or spread site-wide.
  5. Report only the changes that pass the variance threshold.

Decision rules

  • IF an error class grows for two consecutive periods → THEN escalate it as a regression rather than noise
  • IF a spike coincides with a supplied deployment date → THEN note the coincidence as a hypothesis, not a proven cause

Guardrails

  • Never report every fluctuation as a problem
  • Never claim causation from timing alone
  • Do not compare exports generated with different crawl settings

Output

A trend report: error class, previous count, current count, change, template concentration, and escalation status.

Definition of done

  • Variance threshold applied
  • Crawl settings confirmed identical
  • Only threshold-breaching changes escalated
← Click to close
024

Staging & Preprod Leak Detector

Technical SEO Click to open →
024

Staging & Preprod Leak Detector

Purpose

Detects non-production environments and internal URLs exposed to crawlers or search results.

Use when

Monthly, and immediately after any new environment is created.

Not for

Access control and infrastructure security policy.

Inputs

  • List of known environments and hostnames
  • Crawl export including external link targets
  • Index coverage export

Method

  1. Check known staging hostnames for indexability and public accessibility.
  2. Search the production crawl for links pointing to non-production hosts.
  3. Look for production pages referencing staging asset paths.
  4. Verify robots and authentication treatment per environment.
  5. Escalate any exposed environment before recommending SEO fixes.

Decision rules

  • IF a staging environment is publicly accessible and indexable → THEN escalate immediately and recommend authentication, not robots.txt
  • IF production pages link to staging assets → THEN raise a build configuration defect

Guardrails

  • Never rely on robots.txt as the protection mechanism for private environments
  • Never publish discovered staging URLs in a widely shared document
  • Do not attempt to access environments you are not authorised to reach

Output

An exposure register: environment, accessibility, indexing state, referencing production pages, and escalation status.

Definition of done

  • Every known environment checked
  • Production references listed
  • Escalations raised before SEO recommendations
← Click to close
025

Seed Keyword Expander

Keyword Research Click to open →
025

Seed Keyword Expander

Purpose

Turns a small set of seed terms for [PRIMARY TOPIC] into a structured expansion set organised by modifier type.

Use when

At the start of a new topic, market, or product line.

Not for

Final prioritisation; this skill produces candidates, not a plan.

Inputs

  • 3-10 seed terms
  • Product and category vocabulary from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Customer language sources (support tickets, sales calls, reviews)

Method

  1. Break each seed into its head noun, qualifier, and implied job.
  2. Expand along five axes: problem, solution, comparison, use case, and audience.
  3. Add vocabulary variants taken from customer language sources, not invented synonyms.
  4. Mark each candidate with the axis it came from and the source of the wording.
  5. Remove candidates outside the excluded topics list.

Decision rules

  • IF a candidate uses vocabulary the business never uses → THEN keep it only if a customer source supports it
  • IF a candidate matches an excluded topic → THEN drop it and record the exclusion

Guardrails

  • Never invent search volume for any candidate
  • Never present machine-generated variants as verified customer language
  • Do not include competitor brand terms without a stated strategy

Output

An expansion table: candidate term, axis, source of wording, and inclusion status.

Definition of done

  • Every candidate has a source
  • All five axes covered
  • Exclusions applied and listed
← Click to close
026

Search Intent Classifier

Keyword Research Click to open →
026

Search Intent Classifier

Purpose

Assigns each query a documented intent class and the page type required to serve it.

Use when

Before writing briefs or mapping queries to URLs.

Not for

Estimating traffic potential.

Inputs

  • Query list
  • SERP observations or supplied SERP data
  • Site page type inventory

Method

  1. Classify each query as informational, commercial, transactional, or navigational.
  2. Record the evidence used: SERP composition, query wording, or supplied data.
  3. Map each intent class to the page type your site uses to serve it.
  4. Flag mixed-intent queries where the SERP shows more than one dominant format.
  5. List queries where your existing page type does not match the intent.

Decision rules

  • IF the SERP shows two dominant formats → THEN label the query mixed intent and note which format leads
  • IF no SERP evidence is available → THEN mark the classification provisional and state the assumption

Guardrails

  • Never classify intent from the query string alone when SERP data is available
  • Never assume commercial intent because a term includes a product noun
  • Do not present provisional classifications as verified

Output

An intent table: query, class, evidence, required page type, current page type match.

Definition of done

  • Every query has evidence recorded
  • Mixed-intent queries flagged
  • Mismatches listed separately
← Click to close
027

Query Cluster Builder

Keyword Research Click to open →
027

Query Cluster Builder

Purpose

Groups queries into clusters that a single page can realistically serve.

Use when

After expansion and intent classification, before content planning.

Not for

Deciding publication order; use the prioritisation skills for that.

Inputs

  • Classified query list with intent
  • SERP overlap data if available
  • Existing URL to query mapping

Method

  1. Group queries by shared intent and shared answer, not by keyword similarity.
  2. Split any group whose members require different page types.
  3. Name each cluster by the job it does for the reader.
  4. Designate one primary query and list secondary queries per cluster.
  5. Map each cluster to an existing URL or mark it as a gap.

Decision rules

  • IF two queries share wording but need different pages → THEN separate them into distinct clusters
  • IF a cluster maps to more than one existing URL → THEN hand it to the cannibalisation skills before creating content

Guardrails

  • Never build clusters from string similarity alone
  • Never assign one cluster to two URLs without a documented reason
  • Do not invent SERP overlap data

Output

A cluster table: cluster name, primary query, secondary queries, intent, mapped URL or gap flag.

Definition of done

  • Every query belongs to exactly one cluster
  • Each cluster has one primary query
  • URL mapping or gap flag applied
← Click to close
028

Topic Cluster Architect

Keyword Research Click to open →
028

Topic Cluster Architect

Purpose

Designs the hierarchy above the query clusters: which pillar owns which clusters and how they relate.

Use when

When planning a new topic area or restructuring an existing one.

Not for

Writing the content itself.

Inputs

  • Query cluster list
  • Existing site structure
  • Business priority per topic

Method

  1. Group clusters into topics that share a subject and an audience.
  2. Assign each topic one pillar page and define its scope boundary.
  3. Order clusters within each topic from foundational to advanced.
  4. Define the required link relationship between pillar and supporting pages.
  5. Flag clusters that belong to more than one topic and assign a single owner.

Decision rules

  • IF a cluster fits two pillars → THEN assign it to the pillar closest to the buying decision and cross-link the other
  • IF a pillar would need to cover more than eight clusters → THEN split the topic

Guardrails

  • Never create a pillar for a topic with no supporting cluster demand
  • Never let two pillars claim the same primary query
  • Do not design hierarchy that conflicts with the existing URL structure without saying so

Output

A topic architecture map: topic, pillar page, owned clusters in order, cross-links, and structural conflicts.

Definition of done

  • Every cluster assigned to exactly one pillar
  • Pillar scope boundaries stated
  • Structural conflicts listed
← Click to close
029

Buyer Journey Query Mapper

Keyword Research Click to open →
029

Buyer Journey Query Mapper

Purpose

Maps clusters to stages of the buying process so coverage gaps become visible by stage, not just by topic.

Use when

When traffic exists but pipeline does not, or before planning a quarter.

Not for

Attribution modelling.

Inputs

  • Cluster list with intent
  • ICP definition and buyer problems from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Existing page inventory by stage

Method

  1. Define the stages used by this business in its own language.
  2. Assign each cluster to one stage using the query wording and intent evidence.
  3. Count existing pages per stage and identify the thinnest stage.
  4. Identify stages where competitors are present and you are absent.
  5. Recommend the next three clusters to build, one per weakest stage.

Decision rules

  • IF a stage has demand but no page → THEN flag it as a priority gap
  • IF a cluster could sit in two stages → THEN assign it to the later stage and note the earlier fit

Guardrails

  • Never assume stage from search volume
  • Never claim a revenue effect for a stage without supplied conversion data
  • Do not use generic funnel labels that the business does not use

Output

A stage coverage map: stage, clusters, existing pages, gaps, and the three highest-priority builds.

Definition of done

  • Stages named in the company's language
  • Every cluster assigned a stage
  • Gaps ranked
← Click to close
030

Competitor Keyword Gap Analyzer

Keyword Research Click to open →
030

Competitor Keyword Gap Analyzer

Purpose

Finds query clusters where [COMPETITORS] have coverage and [DOMAIN] does not, filtered by strategic fit.

Use when

Quarterly, and before planning a new content cycle.

Not for

Copying competitor content structure.

Inputs

  • Competitor URL and query exports
  • Own query to URL mapping
  • Strategic exclusions from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Normalise both query sets and identify queries covered by competitors only.
  2. Cluster the gap queries rather than listing them individually.
  3. Filter out clusters outside the excluded topics or the ICP.
  4. Assess whether each remaining cluster is winnable given existing topical coverage.
  5. Rank surviving clusters by strategic fit and proximity to revenue.

Decision rules

  • IF a gap cluster sits outside the ICP → THEN drop it regardless of its size
  • IF multiple competitors cover a cluster and you have adjacent authority → THEN raise its priority

Guardrails

  • Never assume a competitor ranks for a term without supplied evidence
  • Never treat a large gap as an opportunity if it fails the ICP filter
  • Do not invent competitor traffic figures

Output

A ranked gap list: cluster, competitors present, strategic fit, winnability note, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Gaps clustered, not listed raw
  • ICP filter applied
  • Winnability justified per cluster
← Click to close
031

Branded vs Non-Branded Splitter

Keyword Research Click to open →
031

Branded vs Non-Branded Splitter

Purpose

Separates branded from non-branded demand so that performance analysis is not distorted by brand growth.

Use when

Before any performance review or forecast.

Not for

Judging brand strength.

Inputs

  • Query list or performance export
  • Brand terms and misspellings from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Competitor brand terms

Method

  1. Build the match rules for own brand, competitor brand, and product-name terms.
  2. Apply the rules and place every query in exactly one bucket.
  3. Review the unmatched bucket manually and extend the rules.
  4. Report each bucket separately with its own totals.
  5. Save the rule set so the split is reproducible next period.

Decision rules

  • IF a product name is also a generic term → THEN create a specific rule and document the ambiguity
  • IF competitor brand terms appear in your data → THEN report them as a third bucket, not non-branded

Guardrails

  • Never report blended totals without the split
  • Never fold competitor brand queries into non-branded performance
  • Do not change the rule set between periods without stating it

Output

Three separated query sets with totals, an ambiguity list, and the saved rule set.

Definition of done

  • Every query bucketed
  • Ambiguities documented
  • Rule set saved for reuse
← Click to close
032

Long-Tail Discovery Engine

Keyword Research Click to open →
032

Long-Tail Discovery Engine

Purpose

Surfaces specific, low-competition queries that existing pages could serve with small additions.

Use when

When you need results without publishing new pages.

Not for

Building new pillar content.

Inputs

  • Query export including low-impression queries
  • Current page to query mapping
  • Page content for the mapped URLs

Method

  1. Extract queries with impressions but weak position that already map to an existing URL.
  2. Group them by the page that nearly serves them.
  3. For each page, identify what the query asks that the page does not answer.
  4. Specify the smallest addition that would serve the query: a section, a definition, or a table row.
  5. Rank pages by number of queries unlocked per page.

Decision rules

  • IF a page nearly serves several related queries → THEN recommend one section covering the group, not one per query
  • IF a query needs a different page type → THEN move it to the content planning skills instead

Guardrails

  • Never invent impression or position figures
  • Never recommend adding thin paragraphs for each query variation
  • Do not target queries whose intent the page cannot honestly satisfy

Output

A per-page opportunity list: page, unlocked queries, missing answer, and the specific addition required.

Definition of done

  • Every opportunity tied to a real query in the export
  • Additions specified concretely
  • Pages ranked by queries unlocked
← Click to close
033

Question Mining Skill

Keyword Research Click to open →
033

Question Mining Skill

Purpose

Collects the real questions your audience asks and formats them for direct use in content and FAQ blocks.

Use when

When building briefs, FAQ sections, or answer-first content.

Not for

Keyword volume analysis.

Inputs

  • Customer-facing sources: support tickets, sales calls, reviews, community threads
  • Query export containing question phrasings
  • Buyer language notes from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Extract questions verbatim from each source and record the source type.
  2. Group duplicates by meaning while keeping the most common phrasing.
  3. Separate pre-purchase, evaluation, and post-purchase questions.
  4. Mark questions that current content answers and those it does not.
  5. Rank unanswered questions by frequency across sources.

Decision rules

  • IF a question appears in both support and search data → THEN raise its priority; it affects acquisition and retention
  • IF a question implies a product limitation → THEN route it to the product or support owner, not only to content

Guardrails

  • Never rewrite customer phrasing into marketing language during collection
  • Never invent questions to fill a section
  • Do not include questions the business cannot answer truthfully

Output

A question bank: question, source type, frequency, stage, answered or unanswered.

Definition of done

  • Every question traceable to a source
  • Answered status verified against live pages
  • Ranked list of unanswered questions produced
← Click to close
034

Keyword Difficulty Interpreter

Keyword Research Click to open →
034

Keyword Difficulty Interpreter

Purpose

Translates supplied difficulty metrics into a realistic assessment for this specific site.

Use when

Before committing resources to a competitive cluster.

Not for

Producing difficulty scores; the tool supplies those.

Inputs

  • Difficulty metrics from your chosen tool
  • SERP composition for the target queries
  • Your site's authority and topical coverage evidence

Method

  1. Record the supplied difficulty figure and the tool that produced it.
  2. Describe the actual SERP: page types, publishers, and content depth.
  3. Compare your existing topical coverage against the ranking pages.
  4. State what would have to be true for your page to compete.
  5. Give a verdict: pursue now, pursue after supporting content, or skip.

Decision rules

  • IF the SERP is dominated by page types you cannot produce → THEN recommend skipping regardless of the difficulty score
  • IF difficulty is high but your topical coverage is strong → THEN recommend pursuing with a supporting content requirement

Guardrails

  • Never treat a difficulty score from one tool as an absolute standard
  • Never predict a ranking position
  • Do not ignore SERP composition in favour of a single number

Output

A verdict per cluster: supplied score, SERP description, coverage comparison, requirements, and recommendation.

Definition of done

  • Tool source named
  • SERP described, not assumed
  • Requirements stated before the verdict
← Click to close
035

Demand Prioritization Scorer

Keyword Research Click to open →
035

Demand Prioritization Scorer

Purpose

Scores clusters on a consistent model so planning debates are about weights, not opinions.

Use when

Before each planning cycle.

Not for

One-off decisions about a single page.

Inputs

  • Cluster list with available demand data
  • Business priority weights from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Current coverage status per cluster

Method

  1. Define the scoring dimensions and their weights before scoring anything.
  2. Score each cluster on demand, business fit, competitive feasibility, and effort.
  3. Note the evidence supporting each score, or mark it as an estimate.
  4. Produce the ranked list and identify where estimates change the order.
  5. Record the weights used so the next cycle is comparable.

Decision rules

  • IF a score relies on an estimate that changes the ranking → THEN flag the cluster as decision-sensitive and request data
  • IF two clusters score within one point → THEN break the tie with business fit, not demand

Guardrails

  • Never present estimates as measured data
  • Never change weights mid-cycle without recording it
  • Do not score effort without input from the team who will do the work

Output

A scored and ranked cluster table with weights, evidence markers, and decision-sensitive flags.

Definition of done

  • Weights fixed before scoring
  • Estimates marked
  • Ranked output reproducible
← Click to close
036

Semantic Relationship Mapper

Keyword Research Click to open →
036

Semantic Relationship Mapper

Purpose

Maps the concepts, attributes, and adjacent subjects that a comprehensive page on [PRIMARY TOPIC] should address.

Use when

When writing briefs for competitive or technical topics.

Not for

Keyword density optimisation.

Inputs

  • Target cluster and primary query
  • Top-ranking page structures for reference
  • Internal subject-matter sources

Method

  1. List the core concepts a knowledgeable reader expects the page to cover.
  2. Add attributes, constraints, and comparisons associated with those concepts.
  3. Identify adjacent subjects that belong on a different page and mark them out of scope.
  4. Map each in-scope concept to a section of the planned page.
  5. Flag concepts requiring subject-matter input or evidence.

Decision rules

  • IF a concept requires expertise the team lacks → THEN flag it for a subject-matter interview before drafting
  • IF a concept is adjacent but has its own demand → THEN move it out of scope and add it to the cluster backlog

Guardrails

  • Never present a concept list as a term-frequency requirement
  • Never include concepts the page cannot cover credibly
  • Do not copy competitor section structures wholesale

Output

A concept map: in-scope concepts by section, out-of-scope subjects, and items needing expert input.

Definition of done

  • Scope boundary stated
  • Every concept mapped to a section
  • Expert input items flagged
← Click to close
037

Local Modifier Expander

Keyword Research Click to open →
037

Local Modifier Expander

Purpose

Builds the geographic query variations that matter for [MARKET] without generating page templates nobody searches for.

Use when

Before planning location pages or service-area content.

Not for

National content planning.

Inputs

  • Service or product list
  • Priority locations from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Evidence of local demand where available

Method

  1. Build the combination grid of services and locations.
  2. Add the modifier patterns people actually use in the market language.
  3. Filter combinations to those with demand evidence or genuine service coverage.
  4. Mark combinations where you can produce genuinely distinct content.
  5. Output only the combinations passing both filters.

Decision rules

  • IF a combination has demand but no real service coverage → THEN exclude it and note the gap for the business
  • IF a combination has coverage but no demand evidence → THEN hold it in a backlog rather than building a page

Guardrails

  • Never generate location pages for areas you do not serve
  • Never assume demand from population size alone
  • Do not fabricate local search volumes

Output

A filtered combination table: service, location, modifier pattern, demand evidence, coverage status.

Definition of done

  • Both filters applied
  • Excluded combinations listed with reasons
  • Market language verified
← Click to close
038

Seasonality Pattern Reader

Keyword Research Click to open →
038

Seasonality Pattern Reader

Purpose

Identifies recurring demand cycles in supplied data and converts them into publishing and refresh dates.

Use when

During annual planning, and before interpreting any performance drop.

Not for

Explaining a one-off change with no historical pattern.

Inputs

  • At least 24 months of impression or demand data
  • Cluster to query mapping
  • Business calendar events

Method

  1. Plot demand by month per cluster across all supplied years.
  2. Identify patterns repeating in at least two complete years and mark single-year spikes separately.
  3. Determine the lead time each cluster needs before its peak.
  4. Produce the publish-by and refresh-by date for each seasonal cluster.
  5. List clusters with no reliable pattern.

Decision rules

  • IF a pattern appears in only one year → THEN treat it as an event, not seasonality
  • IF a cluster peaks within eight weeks → THEN set the publish-by date at least one quarter earlier

Guardrails

  • Never infer seasonality from fewer than two complete cycles
  • Never attribute a decline to seasonality without the historical data to support it
  • Do not extrapolate a trend line beyond the supplied data

Output

A seasonal calendar: cluster, peak window, lead time, publish-by date, refresh-by date, and confidence.

Definition of done

  • Minimum two cycles verified
  • Single-year spikes separated
  • Dates assigned per cluster
← Click to close
039

Query Fan-Out Modeler

Keyword Research Click to open →
039

Query Fan-Out Modeler

Purpose

Anticipates the follow-up questions a search or AI system may generate from a primary query, and checks whether your page serves them.

Use when

When optimising for AI answers and multi-step search journeys.

Not for

Traditional keyword volume research.

Inputs

  • Primary query and cluster
  • Current page content
  • Known follow-up questions from the question bank

Method

  1. Decompose the primary query into the sub-questions required to answer it fully.
  2. Add the natural next questions a reader would ask after receiving the answer.
  3. Check which of these the current page answers explicitly and extractably.
  4. Identify sub-questions answered elsewhere on the site but not linked from this page.
  5. Specify the sections or links needed to close each gap.

Decision rules

  • IF a sub-question is answered on another page → THEN recommend a contextual link rather than duplicating the answer
  • IF a sub-question has no answer anywhere on the site → THEN route it to the content backlog

Guardrails

  • Never assume a fan-out question exists without a linguistic or evidence basis
  • Never duplicate answers across pages to cover fan-out
  • Do not claim knowledge of any engine's internal query expansion behaviour

Output

A fan-out map: sub-question, answered on this page, answered elsewhere, or missing, with the action per row.

Definition of done

  • Every sub-question has a status
  • Actions distinguish linking from writing
  • No duplicated answers recommended
← Click to close
040

Cannibalization Risk Detector

Keyword Research Click to open →
040

Cannibalization Risk Detector

Purpose

Detects where multiple URLs target the same primary query before the content is written.

Use when

During planning, and before publishing any new page.

Not for

Resolving an existing cannibalisation problem in live data; use the reporting skill for that.

Inputs

  • Planned cluster to URL mapping
  • Existing page to query mapping
  • Site search or crawl export of titles and H1s

Method

  1. Match each planned primary query against existing page targets.
  2. Flag exact and near-exact target overlaps.
  3. Check whether overlapping pages serve different intents or the same one.
  4. Recommend one of three resolutions: merge, differentiate, or retarget the new page.
  5. Record the decision so the mapping stays authoritative.

Decision rules

  • IF an existing page already targets the planned primary query → THEN block publication until the overlap is resolved
  • IF two pages target the same query but different intents → THEN retarget one and document the distinction

Guardrails

  • Never publish a second page on a query without a documented differentiation
  • Never resolve overlap by deleting a ranking page
  • Do not assume different URLs mean different targets

Output

An overlap register: planned query, conflicting URL, intent comparison, resolution, and decision owner.

Definition of done

  • Every planned query checked against the existing map
  • Resolution recorded per conflict
  • Mapping updated
← Click to close
041

Entity Map Builder

Keyword Research Click to open →
041

Entity Map Builder

Purpose

Defines the entities your site should be associated with — products, categories, people, places, and concepts — and how they are expressed.

Use when

When building topical authority or preparing for AI search visibility.

Not for

Schema markup implementation; that comes after this map exists.

Inputs

  • Brand and product definitions from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Existing about, product, and author pages
  • Category vocabulary used in the market

Method

  1. List the entities the business must own, be associated with, or be distinguished from.
  2. For each, record the canonical name, accepted variants, and the one-sentence definition.
  3. Identify where each entity is currently defined on the site.
  4. Flag entities with no canonical definition page.
  5. Note inconsistent descriptions across existing pages.

Decision rules

  • IF an entity has no definition page → THEN recommend creating one before pursuing related queries
  • IF descriptions conflict across pages → THEN designate one source of truth and align the rest

Guardrails

  • Never invent relationships between entities that have no connection to the business
  • Never publish entity claims that cannot be substantiated
  • Do not use different definitions of the same entity across pages

Output

An entity register: entity, canonical name, variants, definition, source-of-truth URL, and inconsistencies.

Definition of done

  • Every entity has a canonical definition
  • Source-of-truth URL assigned or flagged missing
  • Inconsistencies listed
← Click to close
042

SERP Feature Opportunity Scanner

Keyword Research Click to open →
042

SERP Feature Opportunity Scanner

Purpose

Identifies which result features appear for your target clusters and what format is required to be eligible.

Use when

Before writing or restructuring a page for a competitive cluster.

Not for

Guaranteeing feature placement.

Inputs

  • Target query list
  • Observed SERP features per query
  • Current page format for each mapped URL

Method

  1. Record which features appear for each query and which competitor holds them.
  2. Determine the content format each feature requires.
  3. Compare that format against the current page structure.
  4. List the specific structural changes required per page.
  5. Prioritise by feature prominence and effort.

Decision rules

  • IF a feature is held by a competitor with a superior source type → THEN note that format alone will not win it
  • IF a feature requires content the page cannot honestly provide → THEN skip it and record why

Guardrails

  • Never guarantee that a formatting change will win a feature
  • Never fabricate features that were not observed
  • Do not restructure a well-performing page purely to chase a feature

Output

A feature opportunity table: query, feature, current holder, required format, gap, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Features observed, not assumed
  • Structural gaps specified per page
  • Priority assigned
← Click to close
043

Zero-Click Risk Assessor

Keyword Research Click to open →
043

Zero-Click Risk Assessor

Purpose

Estimates whether a cluster is worth pursuing when the answer may be satisfied on the results page or in an AI answer.

Use when

During prioritisation of informational clusters.

Not for

Clusters with clear transactional intent.

Inputs

  • Cluster list with intent
  • Observed SERP and AI answer behaviour for sample queries
  • Business goal for the cluster

Method

  1. Classify each cluster by how completely a short answer satisfies the query.
  2. Note whether the SERP or AI answers already provide that answer directly.
  3. Identify what value remains that only a visit can deliver: tools, depth, data, or purchase.
  4. Recommend pursue, pursue for visibility only, or deprioritise.
  5. For visibility-only clusters, define how success will be measured without clicks.

Decision rules

  • IF the full answer fits in two sentences and is already displayed → THEN recommend visibility-only treatment and measure mentions, not clicks
  • IF the query requires a decision, a tool, or a purchase → THEN treat click potential as intact

Guardrails

  • Never predict click-through rates without supplied data
  • Never abandon a cluster solely because an answer is displayed
  • Do not measure visibility-only clusters against click targets

Output

A risk table: cluster, answer completeness, current display behaviour, residual value, recommendation, and metric.

Definition of done

  • Every cluster has a recommendation
  • Measurement defined for visibility-only clusters
  • No CTR assumptions invented
← Click to close
044

Keyword Portfolio Auditor

Keyword Research Click to open →
044

Keyword Portfolio Auditor

Purpose

Reviews the full target keyword portfolio for coverage balance, drift, and orphaned targets.

Use when

Quarterly.

Not for

Building new clusters.

Inputs

  • Full query to URL mapping
  • Performance export for [DATE RANGE]
  • Topic and stage classification

Method

  1. Summarise the portfolio by topic, stage, and intent to reveal concentration.
  2. Identify targets with no mapped URL and URLs with no target.
  3. Find targets where the ranking URL is not the intended one.
  4. Flag targets that have not moved in two consecutive periods.
  5. Recommend additions, retirements, and remappings.

Decision rules

  • IF the ranking URL differs from the intended target → THEN investigate intent match before forcing the intended URL
  • IF a target has been static across two periods → THEN review whether the page or the target is wrong

Guardrails

  • Never retire a target that still produces conversions
  • Never assume a mismatch is an error without checking intent
  • Do not report portfolio health without the topic and stage breakdown

Output

A portfolio audit: concentration summary, unmapped targets, orphaned URLs, mismatches, and a change list.

Definition of done

  • Concentration reported by topic and stage
  • Every mismatch investigated
  • Change list has owners
← Click to close
045

New Market Query Localizer

Keyword Research Click to open →
045

New Market Query Localizer

Purpose

Rebuilds a query set for a new [MARKET] and [LANGUAGE] using local search behaviour rather than translation.

Use when

Before entering a new country or launching a new language.

Not for

Translating existing content.

Inputs

  • Source market query set
  • Local language sources: competitors, forums, customer conversations
  • Local product and regulatory naming rules

Method

  1. Identify the underlying job behind each source query.
  2. Find how that job is expressed locally, using native sources only.
  3. Record terms with no local equivalent and terms with no source equivalent.
  4. Verify local product, legal, and category naming constraints.
  5. Build the local cluster set independently, then compare with the source set.

Decision rules

  • IF a source term has no natural local equivalent → THEN build the local cluster from the local phrasing and drop the source term
  • IF local regulation restricts a claim or product name → THEN flag it and stop before content planning

Guardrails

  • Never translate keywords literally between markets
  • Never assume search behaviour transfers across countries sharing a language
  • Do not invent local search volumes

Output

A localised cluster set with source mapping, untranslatable terms, local-only clusters, and naming constraints.

Definition of done

  • Local sources used, not translations
  • Naming and regulatory constraints checked
  • Local-only clusters identified
← Click to close
046

Opportunity Scoring Model

Keyword Research Click to open →
046

Opportunity Scoring Model

Purpose

Produces the single ranked backlog that content, technical, and link work all draw from.

Use when

Monthly, after the individual analyses have run.

Not for

Replacing the analyses themselves.

Inputs

  • Outputs from gap, decay, difficulty, and portfolio skills
  • Business priority weights
  • Team capacity for the period

Method

  1. Collect every candidate opportunity into one list with its source skill.
  2. Score each on impact, confidence, and effort using the fixed weights.
  3. Deduplicate opportunities that would be solved by the same action.
  4. Cut the list to what capacity allows and mark the rest as backlog.
  5. State the assumption that would most change the ranking.

Decision rules

  • IF two opportunities are resolved by the same action → THEN merge them and sum the impact
  • IF confidence is low and effort is high → THEN move it below all low-effort items regardless of impact

Guardrails

  • Never score without recording the evidence source
  • Never present the backlog without capacity applied
  • Do not silently change weights between periods

Output

A single ranked backlog: opportunity, source, scores, merged items, committed versus backlog, and key assumption.

Definition of done

  • All source outputs included
  • Duplicates merged
  • Capacity line drawn explicitly
← Click to close
047

Content Refresh Skill

Content Strategy Click to open →
047

Content Refresh Skill

Purpose

Updates an existing page by replacing only the sections that no longer serve current demand, while protecting everything that already performs.

Use when

When a page has lost position or clicks but still holds topical relevance.

Not for

Rewriting a page that is fundamentally targeting the wrong intent.

Inputs

  • Current page content and URL
  • Query coverage for the page across [DATE RANGE]
  • Position and click data per query

Method

  1. Pull the page's current query coverage and list the queries it serves.
  2. Flag sections that answer questions no longer appearing in the data.
  3. Identify three queries the page nearly ranks for but does not properly serve.
  4. Rewrite only those sections, adding the missing answers directly.
  5. Preserve the URL, internal links, and every section ranking in the top three.

Decision rules

  • IF a section is ranking in the top three → THEN leave it untouched, including its headings and wording
  • IF a query has impressions but no matching section → THEN add a new section rather than editing an existing one

Guardrails

  • Never change the URL
  • Never remove internal links during a refresh
  • Never rewrite a top-performing section to make it read better

Output

A revised page with a change log listing every section touched, the reason, and the target query.

Definition of done

  • Top-three sections verified untouched
  • Three under-served queries addressed
  • URL and internal links preserved
← Click to close
048

Topic Prioritization Matrix

Content Strategy Click to open →
048

Topic Prioritization Matrix

Purpose

Decides which topics get investment this cycle based on demand, fit, and existing authority.

Use when

At the start of a planning cycle.

Not for

Ordering individual articles within a topic.

Inputs

  • Topic list with cluster counts
  • Existing coverage and performance per topic
  • Business priorities from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Place every topic on two axes: business proximity and current authority.
  2. Assign each quadrant a standing strategy: build, extend, defend, or ignore.
  3. Allocate the cycle's capacity across quadrants before choosing topics.
  4. Select topics per quadrant and state what success looks like for each.
  5. Record which topics were deliberately not chosen.

Decision rules

  • IF a topic is high business proximity and low authority → THEN assign it to build and allocate the largest share
  • IF a topic is high authority and low business proximity → THEN assign it to defend with maintenance effort only

Guardrails

  • Never allocate all capacity to one quadrant without saying so
  • Never claim authority without supporting performance data
  • Do not leave declined topics undocumented

Output

A two-axis matrix, per-quadrant capacity allocation, selected topics with success criteria, and a declined list.

Definition of done

  • Every topic placed
  • Capacity allocated before selection
  • Declined topics recorded
← Click to close
049

Editorial Calendar Planner

Content Strategy Click to open →
049

Editorial Calendar Planner

Purpose

Converts the prioritised backlog into a dated production schedule constrained by real capacity.

Use when

Monthly or quarterly, after prioritisation.

Not for

Deciding what to write about.

Inputs

  • Ranked backlog
  • Team capacity by role
  • Seasonal dates and business events

Method

  1. Estimate production effort per item by role, not in generic hours.
  2. Place items against capacity, respecting seasonal publish-by dates first.
  3. Sequence dependencies: pillar before supporting pages, research before briefs.
  4. Reserve a fixed share of capacity for refreshes and unplanned work.
  5. Publish the schedule with named owners and review dates.

Decision rules

  • IF capacity is exceeded → THEN move items out rather than compressing review steps
  • IF a dependency is unscheduled → THEN schedule the dependency first and delay the dependent item

Guardrails

  • Never schedule beyond stated capacity
  • Never remove review steps to fit the calendar
  • Do not schedule a supporting page before its pillar

Output

A dated calendar with owner, effort, dependency, and a reserved refresh allocation.

Definition of done

  • Capacity respected
  • Dependencies ordered
  • Refresh allocation reserved
← Click to close
050

Pillar Page Planner

Content Strategy Click to open →
050

Pillar Page Planner

Purpose

Specifies a pillar page: its scope, its sections, and its relationship to every supporting page.

Use when

When opening a new topic or consolidating scattered coverage.

Not for

Short tactical articles.

Inputs

  • Topic architecture map
  • Cluster list owned by the pillar
  • Existing pages within the topic

Method

  1. Define the pillar's scope boundary and state explicitly what it will not cover.
  2. Structure sections so each supporting cluster has a summary and a link target.
  3. Decide what the pillar answers in full versus what it delegates.
  4. Specify the link contract: which supporting pages link up and which the pillar links down to.
  5. Identify existing pages to consolidate into the pillar.

Decision rules

  • IF a supporting cluster has its own strong demand → THEN summarise it on the pillar and link out rather than covering it in full
  • IF an existing page overlaps the pillar's scope → THEN decide merge or differentiate before the pillar is written

Guardrails

  • Never build a pillar that duplicates its supporting pages
  • Never leave the scope boundary undefined
  • Do not consolidate pages with backlinks without a redirect plan

Output

A pillar specification: scope, section outline, delegation rules, link contract, and consolidation list.

Definition of done

  • Scope boundary written
  • Every owned cluster represented
  • Link contract defined in both directions
← Click to close
051

Supporting Article Planner

Content Strategy Click to open →
051

Supporting Article Planner

Purpose

Defines each supporting page's job so it complements rather than competes with the pillar and its siblings.

Use when

After the pillar specification exists.

Not for

Planning the pillar itself.

Inputs

  • Pillar specification
  • Cluster assigned to this article
  • Sibling article list with their targets

Method

  1. State the one question this article answers that no sibling answers.
  2. Set the depth boundary: what it covers fully and what it links out for.
  3. Define the required links up to the pillar and across to siblings.
  4. Specify the reader's next step after finishing.
  5. Check the target query against every sibling to confirm no overlap.

Decision rules

  • IF the article's question overlaps a sibling → THEN merge them or narrow one before briefing
  • IF the article cannot answer its question without covering the pillar's scope → THEN reduce its scope and link up

Guardrails

  • Never brief two articles with the same primary query
  • Never plan a supporting page without a defined link to its pillar
  • Do not duplicate the pillar's core explanation

Output

An article specification: unique question, depth boundary, link plan, next step, and overlap check result.

Definition of done

  • Unique question stated
  • Overlap check completed against all siblings
  • Link plan defined
← Click to close
052

Content Brief Builder

Content Strategy Click to open →
052

Content Brief Builder

Purpose

Produces a brief a writer can execute without asking follow-up questions.

Use when

Before any page is written or substantially rewritten.

Not for

Editing an existing draft.

Inputs

  • Cluster with primary and secondary queries
  • Concept map and question bank entries
  • Tone, evidence, and claim rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. State the reader, their situation, and the decision the page supports.
  2. Provide the section outline with the question each section answers.
  3. Attach required evidence, sources, and internal links per section.
  4. Specify format requirements: tables, lists, definitions, and summary placement.
  5. List claims requiring approval and words to avoid.

Decision rules

  • IF a section requires evidence the team does not have → THEN mark it blocked and route it to research or a subject-matter interview
  • IF a required claim needs approval → THEN mark it and do not let drafting begin on that section

Guardrails

  • Never brief a word count without a structural reason
  • Never include claims that cannot be substantiated
  • Do not omit the internal link plan from the brief

Output

A complete brief: reader, decision, outline with questions, evidence, links, format rules, and approval flags.

Definition of done

  • Every section has a question
  • Evidence and links attached
  • Blocked items flagged before drafting
← Click to close
053

SME Interview Question Generator

Content Strategy Click to open →
053

SME Interview Question Generator

Purpose

Builds the question set that extracts specific, non-obvious expertise from an internal expert.

Use when

Before writing technical, regulated, or high-expertise content.

Not for

General topic research.

Inputs

  • Brief outline with sections
  • Expert's role and area of authority
  • Concepts flagged as needing expert input

Method

  1. Identify the sections where public sources cannot supply a credible answer.
  2. Write questions that ask for decisions, trade-offs, and failure cases rather than definitions.
  3. Add questions that surface numbers, thresholds, and conditions the expert uses in practice.
  4. Include one question per section on what most people get wrong.
  5. Order questions from concrete experience to general principle.

Decision rules

  • IF a question can be answered by a public source → THEN remove it from the interview and research it separately
  • IF an answer would reveal confidential information → THEN reframe the question toward the generalisable principle

Guardrails

  • Never ask questions whose answers you intend to write yourself
  • Never publish expert claims without attribution and approval
  • Do not lead the expert toward a predetermined answer

Output

An ordered interview guide with per-section questions, follow-up prompts, and an approval note.

Definition of done

  • No question answerable by public sources
  • Every flagged section covered
  • Approval step included
← Click to close
054

Evidence Plan Builder

Content Strategy Click to open →
054

Evidence Plan Builder

Purpose

Decides what proof each claim in a page requires before drafting starts.

Use when

On pages making performance, comparison, or technical claims.

Not for

Opinion or narrative pieces with no factual claims.

Inputs

  • Brief outline with intended claims
  • Available internal data and studies
  • Claim approval rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. List every claim the page intends to make.
  2. Classify each as verifiable internally, verifiable externally, or unsupportable.
  3. Assign the specific source required for each verifiable claim.
  4. Rewrite or remove unsupportable claims before drafting.
  5. Record which claims need legal or executive approval.

Decision rules

  • IF a claim is unsupportable → THEN remove it or convert it into a clearly labelled opinion
  • IF a claim depends on a third-party statistic → THEN require a primary source, not a secondary citation

Guardrails

  • Never cite a statistic without a primary source
  • Never publish comparative claims about competitors without documented evidence
  • Do not let unsupported claims into the draft to be fixed later

Output

An evidence plan: claim, classification, required source, approval status, and drafting clearance.

Definition of done

  • Every claim classified
  • Primary sources named
  • Unsupportable claims removed before drafting
← Click to close
055

Content Gap Analyzer

Content Strategy Click to open →
055

Content Gap Analyzer

Purpose

Compares what your content covers against what the cluster's readers actually need answered.

Use when

Before refreshing a page or planning a topic expansion.

Not for

Competitive backlink analysis.

Inputs

  • Existing page inventory for the topic
  • Question bank and cluster list
  • Competitor page structures for reference

Method

  1. Map every existing page to the questions it answers.
  2. List cluster questions with no page answering them.
  3. Identify questions answered thinly: mentioned but not resolved.
  4. Separate gaps needing a new page from gaps needing a section.
  5. Rank gaps by demand evidence and business proximity.

Decision rules

  • IF a gap can be closed with a section on an existing page → THEN prefer that over creating a new page
  • IF a gap requires expertise or data you lack → THEN flag it as blocked rather than scheduling it

Guardrails

  • Never count a mention as coverage
  • Never plan a new page for a gap an existing page could absorb
  • Do not rank gaps without demand evidence

Output

A gap register: question, current coverage status, closure method, blocker, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Coverage verified against live pages
  • Section versus page decision made per gap
  • Blockers flagged
← Click to close
056

Refresh Prioritization Queue

Content Strategy Click to open →
056

Refresh Prioritization Queue

Purpose

Ranks which existing pages to refresh first, using performance movement and business value.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Deciding how to refresh a specific page.

Inputs

  • Performance export across two comparable periods
  • Page to business value mapping
  • Last update date per page

Method

  1. Identify pages with meaningful decline in clicks or impressions between periods.
  2. Filter out pages whose decline is explained by seasonality or a known cause.
  3. Score remaining pages by business value, decline size, and effort to fix.
  4. Group pages sharing the same likely cause so they can be fixed together.
  5. Produce the ordered refresh queue with expected effort.

Decision rules

  • IF a decline matches a documented seasonal pattern → THEN remove the page from the queue and note why
  • IF several pages decline with the same likely cause → THEN treat the cause once rather than refreshing each page

Guardrails

  • Never queue a refresh without a decline threshold
  • Never compare periods of different lengths
  • Do not refresh pages whose decline is caused by a technical issue

Output

An ordered refresh queue with decline evidence, likely cause, grouping, and effort estimate.

Definition of done

  • Threshold stated
  • Seasonality filtered
  • Causes grouped
← Click to close
057

Content Decay Diagnostician

Content Strategy Click to open →
057

Content Decay Diagnostician

Purpose

Determines why a specific page is losing performance before any rewriting is authorised.

Use when

After the refresh queue identifies a page but before editing it.

Not for

Pages that never performed in the first place.

Inputs

  • Page performance history by query
  • Current page content
  • SERP or competitor changes if observed

Method

  1. Separate query-level loss from page-level loss.
  2. Check whether lost queries moved to another URL on your own site.
  3. Check whether the page still matches the intent its queries now express.
  4. Check technical status: indexability, internal links lost, or rendering changes.
  5. Name a single primary cause and the evidence for it.

Decision rules

  • IF lost queries now rank with another of your URLs → THEN treat it as cannibalisation, not decay
  • IF the page is technically impaired → THEN stop and route it to the technical skills before editing content

Guardrails

  • Never rewrite a page before naming the cause of decline
  • Never assume freshness is the cause
  • Do not attribute decline to an algorithm update without evidence

Output

A diagnosis: primary cause, supporting evidence, ruled-out causes, and the correct next skill.

Definition of done

  • Cause named with evidence
  • Alternatives explicitly ruled out
  • Next skill specified
← Click to close
058

Content Consolidation Planner

Content Strategy Click to open →
058

Content Consolidation Planner

Purpose

Plans the merge of overlapping pages into one authoritative page without losing equity.

Use when

When several pages compete for the same cluster.

Not for

Pages serving genuinely different intents.

Inputs

  • Candidate URL set with performance and backlink data
  • Content of each candidate
  • Internal link map to each candidate

Method

  1. Select the destination URL using performance, backlinks, and URL quality.
  2. Map every unique section from the sources to a place in the destination.
  3. List content that will be dropped and justify each removal.
  4. Specify redirects from every source to the destination.
  5. Specify internal link updates so no link points at a redirected URL.

Decision rules

  • IF a source page has stronger backlinks but weaker content → THEN keep its URL as the destination and move the content into it
  • IF a section exists only on a source page and still earns impressions → THEN carry it into the destination unchanged

Guardrails

  • Never delete a source page without a redirect
  • Never drop content that currently earns impressions without stating the trade-off
  • Do not consolidate pages that serve different intents

Output

A consolidation plan: destination, section mapping, dropped content, redirect list, and internal link updates.

Definition of done

  • Destination justified by evidence
  • Every source section mapped or justified as dropped
  • Redirects and link updates specified
← Click to close
059

Content Pruning Advisor

Content Strategy Click to open →
059

Content Pruning Advisor

Purpose

Decides what to do with content that no longer earns its place: improve, merge, redirect, or retire.

Use when

Annually, or before a migration.

Not for

Recently published content that has not had time to perform.

Inputs

  • Full page inventory with age, performance, and backlinks
  • Business value mapping
  • Content that must be retained for legal or brand reasons

Method

  1. Exclude pages younger than the agreed maturity window and protected pages.
  2. Classify remaining pages by performance and strategic value.
  3. Assign each low performer one action: improve, merge, redirect, or retire.
  4. For retirement, specify the status code and any redirect target.
  5. Estimate the volume of pages affected per action.

Decision rules

  • IF a page has no traffic but holds backlinks → THEN redirect rather than retire
  • IF a page has no traffic and serves a legal or support function → THEN retain and exclude from SEO scoring

Guardrails

  • Never retire pages without checking backlinks and internal links
  • Never treat page count reduction as the goal
  • Do not prune content younger than the maturity window

Output

A pruning plan by action with per-page justification, status codes, and redirect targets.

Definition of done

  • Maturity window and protections applied
  • Backlink check per retirement
  • Actions justified individually
← Click to close
060

BOFU Content Designer

Content Strategy Click to open →
060

BOFU Content Designer

Purpose

Designs the pages that serve buyers who are close to a decision.

Use when

When traffic exists at the top of the funnel but not at the point of decision.

Not for

Awareness content.

Inputs

  • ICP and buyer objections from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Sales call notes or objection lists
  • Existing product and pricing pages

Method

  1. List the questions buyers ask in the final evaluation stage, in their words.
  2. Determine which of those questions have search demand and which do not.
  3. Design one page per decision question, not one per keyword.
  4. Specify the proof each page must carry: evidence, comparison, and next step.
  5. Define the conversion path and what happens after the click.

Decision rules

  • IF a decision question has no search demand → THEN keep the page for sales enablement and exclude it from search targets
  • IF a question is about competitors → THEN route it to the comparison page skill instead

Guardrails

  • Never make competitive claims without documented evidence
  • Never design a decision page without a defined next step
  • Do not promise outcomes the product cannot demonstrate

Output

A page set specification: decision question, demand status, required proof, conversion path, and owner.

Definition of done

  • Questions sourced from real buyer conversations
  • Demand status recorded
  • Conversion path defined per page
← Click to close
061

Product-Led SEO Page Planner

Content Strategy Click to open →
061

Product-Led SEO Page Planner

Purpose

Plans scalable page sets built from product data or functionality rather than hand-written articles.

Use when

When a data set or feature can serve many similar queries.

Not for

One-off editorial pieces.

Inputs

  • Available data set or feature inventory
  • Query pattern evidence for the page type
  • Template and engineering constraints

Method

  1. Define the repeating query pattern the page set will serve.
  2. Specify what makes each generated page genuinely useful and distinct.
  3. Set the minimum data requirement below which a page is not generated.
  4. Define the template: sections, data fields, and the editorial layer.
  5. Specify indexing rules for pages that fall below the data threshold.

Decision rules

  • IF a generated page would not meet the minimum data requirement → THEN do not generate it at all
  • IF pages differ only by a single variable substitution → THEN redesign the template before proceeding

Guardrails

  • Never generate pages that differ only by a swapped word
  • Never publish generated pages without an indexing threshold rule
  • Do not scale a template before validating on a sample

Output

A page-set specification: query pattern, template, data thresholds, distinctness rules, and indexing policy.

Definition of done

  • Minimum data threshold defined
  • Distinctness demonstrated on a sample
  • Indexing policy written
← Click to close
062

Comparison Page Builder

Content Strategy Click to open →
062

Comparison Page Builder

Purpose

Specifies a fair, evidence-based comparison page that serves buyers evaluating alternatives.

Use when

When your category has established alternatives buyers search for.

Not for

Attacking a competitor.

Inputs

  • Comparison criteria that matter to the ICP
  • Verified information about each option
  • Legal and claim rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Define the criteria buyers actually use, taken from sales conversations.
  2. Collect verifiable facts per option and record the source and date for each.
  3. Present the comparison in a consistent table with identical criteria per option.
  4. State plainly where a competitor is a better fit and for whom.
  5. Set the review date after which unverified facts must be rechecked.

Decision rules

  • IF a fact cannot be verified from a primary source → THEN omit it rather than estimating
  • IF a competitor is genuinely stronger on a criterion → THEN state it and explain who should choose them

Guardrails

  • Never publish competitor facts without a source and date
  • Never claim superiority on criteria you did not test
  • Do not present outdated competitor information as current

Output

A comparison specification: criteria, per-option facts with sources and dates, fit statements, and a review date.

Definition of done

  • Every fact sourced and dated
  • Criteria identical across options
  • Honest fit statements included
← Click to close
063

Alternatives Page Builder

Content Strategy Click to open →
063

Alternatives Page Builder

Purpose

Specifies a page serving people searching for alternatives to a named tool or approach, including yours.

Use when

When alternatives queries show demand in your category.

Not for

Direct head-to-head comparison; use the comparison skill for that.

Inputs

  • List of genuine alternatives
  • Selection criteria per use case
  • Verified facts per alternative

Method

  1. Define the use cases that make each alternative the right choice.
  2. Describe each option neutrally with sourced facts and a clear best-fit statement.
  3. Position your own option honestly within the same structure and format.
  4. Add a selection guide keyed to the reader's constraints.
  5. Record the source and date for every claim.

Decision rules

  • IF your product is not the best fit for a listed use case → THEN say so and name the option that is
  • IF an alternative is no longer maintained or available → THEN remove it and note the change date

Guardrails

  • Never list fake alternatives to appear comprehensive
  • Never give your own option a different evaluation standard
  • Do not omit strong alternatives buyers already know

Output

An alternatives page specification: option list, use-case fit, sourced facts, selection guide, and review date.

Definition of done

  • Same standard applied to all options
  • Sources and dates recorded
  • Selection guide keyed to constraints
← Click to close
064

Category Page Strategist

Content Strategy Click to open →
064

Category Page Strategist

Purpose

Turns a navigational category or collection page into a page that can rank and convert.

Use when

On e-commerce, marketplace, or directory sites.

Not for

Individual product or article pages.

Inputs

  • Category URL and current content
  • Query cluster mapped to the category
  • Product or item data available for the category

Method

  1. Define what the category page must answer beyond listing items.
  2. Specify the placement of supporting copy so it does not push items below the fold.
  3. Define the filtering and sorting exposure rules for crawlers.
  4. Specify internal links to subcategories and the parent category.
  5. Define how empty or thin categories are handled.

Decision rules

  • IF a category has too few items to be useful → THEN recommend merging it upward and redirecting
  • IF supporting copy would push items below the fold → THEN move it below the item grid

Guardrails

  • Never place large text blocks above the item listing
  • Never let a category page rank for a query its items cannot satisfy
  • Do not leave empty categories indexable

Output

A category page specification: content blocks, placement, filter exposure, link plan, and thin-category rule.

Definition of done

  • Query cluster mapped
  • Placement rules stated
  • Thin-category handling defined
← Click to close
065

Content Template Designer

Content Strategy Click to open →
065

Content Template Designer

Purpose

Creates the reusable structure for a recurring content type so quality does not depend on the writer.

Use when

When the same page type will be produced repeatedly.

Not for

One-off flagship pieces.

Inputs

  • Examples of the page type that performed well
  • Reader questions the type must answer
  • Format and tone rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Identify the sections common to the strongest existing examples.
  2. Define the required, optional, and forbidden sections for the type.
  3. Specify the answer-first opening and summary requirements.
  4. Define the internal link and evidence requirements per section.
  5. Write the acceptance checklist a draft must pass.

Decision rules

  • IF a section appears in strong examples but not weak ones → THEN make it required
  • IF a section adds length without answering a reader question → THEN forbid it

Guardrails

  • Never impose a template that prevents answering the query directly
  • Never require word counts in place of structural requirements
  • Do not template content types that vary fundamentally

Output

A page-type template: section list with status, per-section requirements, and an acceptance checklist.

Definition of done

  • Sections classified as required, optional, or forbidden
  • Each section tied to a reader question
  • Checklist testable
← Click to close
066

Narrative Angle Finder

Content Strategy Click to open →
066

Narrative Angle Finder

Purpose

Finds the specific point of view that differentiates a page in a crowded topic.

Use when

When the cluster is well covered and the plan risks producing a fifth identical article.

Not for

Pages where a neutral reference format is the correct choice.

Inputs

  • Top existing pages for the cluster
  • Internal data, experience, or opinions available
  • Brand position from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Summarise the argument each existing page makes in one sentence.
  2. Identify the assumption they all share.
  3. List what your business knows or has done that they cannot claim.
  4. Formulate two candidate angles that are defensible with your evidence.
  5. Select one and state the evidence it depends on.

Decision rules

  • IF an angle requires evidence you do not have → THEN discard it rather than asserting it
  • IF every existing page already makes your angle → THEN narrow it to a specific audience or condition

Guardrails

  • Never manufacture a contrarian position for its own sake
  • Never claim experience the business does not have
  • Do not select an angle before checking the required evidence exists

Output

A selected angle with the shared assumption it challenges, supporting evidence, and the discarded alternative.

Definition of done

  • Existing arguments summarised
  • Angle backed by named evidence
  • Alternative recorded
← Click to close
067

Source & Citation Planner

Content Strategy Click to open →
067

Source & Citation Planner

Purpose

Plans which external sources a page will cite and verifies they are primary, current, and appropriate.

Use when

On research-backed, technical, or regulated content.

Not for

Purely product-focused pages.

Inputs

  • Claim list from the evidence plan
  • Candidate sources with dates
  • Source quality rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Match each claim to a candidate source and check that the source is primary.
  2. Verify the publication date and whether more recent data exists.
  3. Confirm the source actually states what the claim asserts.
  4. Replace secondary citations with the original source wherever possible.
  5. Record the full citation and access date for every retained source.

Decision rules

  • IF a source is a secondary report of another study → THEN trace and cite the original study
  • IF no primary source supports a claim → THEN remove the claim from the page

Guardrails

  • Never cite a source you have not verified says what you claim
  • Never fabricate citations, authors, dates, or study names
  • Do not cite sources whose methodology contradicts the claim

Output

A citation plan: claim, verified source, publication date, access date, and full reference.

Definition of done

  • Every claim has a verified primary source
  • Dates recorded
  • Unsupported claims removed
← Click to close
068

Content Governance Rulebook

Content Strategy Click to open →
068

Content Governance Rulebook

Purpose

Documents the editorial rules Claude and the team apply to every page, so standards do not vary by author.

Use when

Once per site, then reviewed quarterly.

Not for

Individual page decisions.

Inputs

  • Existing style and brand guidelines
  • Claim approval and legal constraints
  • Examples of accepted and rejected content

Method

  1. Write the rules for structure, tone, evidence, claims, and formatting.
  2. State the approval path for each content type and claim class.
  3. Define what must never appear: prohibited claims, phrases, and formats.
  4. Define the review cadence and the owner for each rule set.
  5. Provide accepted and rejected examples for each ambiguous rule.

Decision rules

  • IF a rule cannot be tested objectively → THEN rewrite it until it can be, or remove it
  • IF two rules conflict → THEN state which takes precedence and why

Guardrails

  • Never write rules without examples for ambiguous cases
  • Never leave approval ownership unassigned
  • Do not include rules the team has no capacity to enforce

Output

A governance document: rules by category, approval paths, prohibitions, examples, owners, and review cadence.

Definition of done

  • Every rule testable
  • Owners named
  • Examples supplied for ambiguous rules
← Click to close
069

Title Tag Optimizer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
069

Title Tag Optimizer

Purpose

Rewrites title tags so they match query intent, differentiate from competing results, and survive truncation.

Use when

On new pages, and on pages with impressions but weak click-through.

Not for

Pages already achieving strong click-through at their position.

Inputs

  • Current titles and URLs
  • Primary query and observed competing titles
  • Brand naming rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Confirm the primary query for each page from the mapping, not from the current title.
  2. Check whether the current title states the page's specific value within the visible length.
  3. Write a replacement placing the distinguishing term before the brand suffix.
  4. Compare against the competing titles to ensure it is not interchangeable.
  5. Flag any page where the title cannot be improved and say why.

Decision rules

  • IF a page has strong click-through for its position → THEN leave the title unchanged
  • IF the title is truncated before the distinguishing term → THEN restructure rather than shorten wording arbitrarily

Guardrails

  • Never write a title the page content does not deliver
  • Never remove a brand suffix without checking brand query performance
  • Do not stuff secondary queries into the title

Output

A title change table: URL, current title, proposed title, rationale, and no-change flags.

Definition of done

  • Primary query verified per page
  • Distinguishing term within visible length
  • No-change pages justified
← Click to close
070

Meta Description Rewriter

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
070

Meta Description Rewriter

Purpose

Rewrites descriptions to set accurate expectations and improve the odds of a considered click.

Use when

On pages with high impressions and low click-through.

Not for

Pages with very low impressions where the sample is unreliable.

Inputs

  • Current descriptions
  • Impression and click data per page
  • Page content summary

Method

  1. Identify pages where impressions are sufficient for the click-through figure to be meaningful.
  2. Check whether the description answers what the searcher will get on the page.
  3. Rewrite with the specific outcome, format, and scope of the page.
  4. Remove promises the page does not fulfil.
  5. Note that engines may rewrite descriptions and set expectations accordingly.

Decision rules

  • IF impressions are below the reliability threshold → THEN leave the page out of this batch
  • IF the description promises content the page lacks → THEN fix the page or reduce the promise

Guardrails

  • Never promise content the page does not contain
  • Never present click-through improvements as guaranteed
  • Do not rewrite descriptions on pages with insufficient impression data

Output

A rewrite table: URL, impressions, current and proposed description, and the change rationale.

Definition of done

  • Reliability threshold applied
  • Promises verified against page content
  • Rationale recorded per change
← Click to close
071

Heading Structure Auditor

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
071

Heading Structure Auditor

Purpose

Checks that headings describe the content beneath them and form a logical, extractable outline.

Use when

Before publishing, and on any page being refreshed.

Not for

Visual design or typography decisions.

Inputs

  • Page heading outline
  • Questions the page is meant to answer
  • Template heading rules

Method

  1. Extract the heading outline and read it as a standalone summary.
  2. Check that each heading names the question or subject of its section.
  3. Flag headings that are decorative, vague, or duplicated.
  4. Verify hierarchy: one H1, no skipped levels, and correct nesting.
  5. Rewrite failing headings using the reader's phrasing.

Decision rules

  • IF the outline alone does not convey the page content → THEN rewrite the headings until it does
  • IF a heading is a marketing phrase → THEN replace it with the question it answers

Guardrails

  • Never use headings that do not describe their section
  • Never insert headings solely to include a query
  • Do not change headings on sections ranking in the top three

Output

A heading audit: current outline, failures with reasons, and the proposed outline.

Definition of done

  • Outline readable as a summary
  • Hierarchy validated
  • Top-three sections preserved
← Click to close
072

Answer-First Rewriter

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
072

Answer-First Rewriter

Purpose

Restructures a page so the direct answer appears before the context, explanation, and background.

Use when

On pages where the answer currently appears after several paragraphs of build-up.

Not for

Narrative or story-led formats where sequence is the point.

Inputs

  • Page content
  • The primary question the page answers
  • Format rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Locate where the page currently answers its primary question.
  2. Write a direct answer of two to four sentences that stands alone.
  3. Place it immediately after the H1 and before any context.
  4. Move the removed build-up into a later section if it still adds value.
  5. Verify the rest of the page supports rather than repeats the answer.

Decision rules

  • IF the page cannot answer its question in four sentences → THEN narrow the page's scope or split it
  • IF the opening currently ranks for a featured result → THEN preserve it and improve around it

Guardrails

  • Never delay the answer to increase reading time
  • Never write an opening answer the body contradicts
  • Do not repeat the answer verbatim in later sections

Output

A restructured page with the standalone answer block and a note on relocated content.

Definition of done

  • Answer stands alone without the surrounding page
  • Placed before context
  • No contradiction with the body
← Click to close
073

Featured Snippet Formatter

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
073

Featured Snippet Formatter

Purpose

Formats a specific passage to match the structure a result feature requires for the target query.

Use when

When a target query shows a feature your page is close to earning.

Not for

Queries where no feature appears.

Inputs

  • Target query and observed feature format
  • Current page section addressing the query
  • Competing content currently holding the feature

Method

  1. Identify the format the feature uses: paragraph, list, table, or steps.
  2. Locate the section that should carry it and check its current structure.
  3. Reformat that section to the required structure with a clear preceding heading.
  4. Keep the passage self-contained so it makes sense out of context.
  5. Note that eligibility does not guarantee selection.

Decision rules

  • IF the required format does not suit the content → THEN do not force it; improve clarity instead
  • IF the page already holds the feature → THEN make no structural change

Guardrails

  • Never restructure content into a format that misrepresents it
  • Never promise feature acquisition
  • Do not remove depth to fit a snippet length

Output

A reformatted passage with the target query, required format, and a before-and-after comparison.

Definition of done

  • Format matches the observed feature
  • Passage self-contained
  • No content accuracy lost
← Click to close
074

FAQ Block Builder

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
074

FAQ Block Builder

Purpose

Builds a genuine FAQ section from real questions, placed and formatted so it can be extracted.

Use when

On pages where readers have recurring follow-up questions.

Not for

Adding keyword variations disguised as questions.

Inputs

  • Question bank entries relevant to the page
  • Existing page content
  • Schema rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Select questions readers actually ask that the page body does not already answer.
  2. Write answers of two to four sentences that are complete on their own.
  3. Order questions by frequency and by stage of the reader's decision.
  4. Place the block where it does not interrupt the primary answer flow.
  5. Confirm answer text is visible on the page before any markup is considered.

Decision rules

  • IF a question is answered in the body → THEN link to that section instead of duplicating it
  • IF an answer requires more than four sentences → THEN give the short answer and link to the full page

Guardrails

  • Never invent questions to increase page length
  • Never mark up FAQ content that is not visible on the page
  • Do not duplicate body answers inside the FAQ

Output

An FAQ block: questions, standalone answers, placement note, and duplication check results.

Definition of done

  • Questions sourced from the question bank
  • Answers standalone and visible
  • No duplication with the body
← Click to close
075

Entity Clarity Checker

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
075

Entity Clarity Checker

Purpose

Verifies that a page states plainly what it is about, who it is for, and which entities it refers to.

Use when

On pages competing in ambiguous or crowded topics, and before AI visibility work.

Not for

Pages with a single unambiguous subject already stated.

Inputs

  • Page content
  • Entity register from the entity map
  • Brand and product naming rules

Method

  1. Check whether the page names its subject explicitly in the opening.
  2. Verify entities are referred to by their canonical names before any abbreviation.
  3. Flag pronouns and vague references standing in for entities.
  4. Confirm the audience and scope are stated rather than implied.
  5. Align descriptions with the entity register.

Decision rules

  • IF an entity is introduced only by an abbreviation → THEN add the canonical name at first mention
  • IF the page's subject is only implied → THEN add an explicit statement in the opening

Guardrails

  • Never introduce an entity name that conflicts with the register
  • Never assume the reader has read another page for context
  • Do not rely on the title to define the subject

Output

A clarity report: ambiguous references, missing definitions, and proposed replacement wording.

Definition of done

  • Subject stated explicitly
  • Canonical names used at first mention
  • Audience and scope stated
← Click to close
076

Passage Extractability Reviewer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
076

Passage Extractability Reviewer

Purpose

Assesses whether individual passages make sense when lifted out of the page.

Use when

On reference, definition, and how-to content.

Not for

Long-form narrative where continuity is deliberate.

Inputs

  • Page content with heading structure
  • Target queries per section
  • Reader questions per section

Method

  1. Split the page into passages at heading and paragraph boundaries.
  2. Read each passage in isolation and judge whether it answers something completely.
  3. Flag passages depending on prior context: unresolved pronouns, implied subjects, or continuing lists.
  4. Rewrite flagged passages to be self-contained without adding repetition.
  5. Confirm each passage's first sentence carries its main point.

Decision rules

  • IF a passage relies on the previous paragraph to make sense → THEN restate the subject once in its opening sentence
  • IF restating context would create heavy repetition → THEN merge the passages instead

Guardrails

  • Never repeat the same context in every paragraph
  • Never break coherent explanations into fragments for extractability
  • Do not rewrite passages that already perform in the top three

Output

A passage-level review: passage, extractability verdict, dependency found, and the rewritten opening.

Definition of done

  • Every passage assessed
  • Dependencies named specifically
  • Repetition avoided
← Click to close
077

Schema Opportunity Mapper

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
077

Schema Opportunity Mapper

Purpose

Identifies which structured data types a page genuinely qualifies for based on its actual content.

Use when

When planning markup for a template or a new page type.

Not for

Validating markup already deployed.

Inputs

  • Page content by template
  • Currently deployed schema types
  • Content elements available per template

Method

  1. Inventory the content elements each template actually contains.
  2. Match those elements to schema types whose required properties they satisfy.
  3. Exclude types requiring content the template does not have.
  4. Specify property-to-content-field mapping for each recommended type.
  5. State the expected benefit and the eligibility conditions.

Decision rules

  • IF a type requires properties the page lacks → THEN exclude it rather than recommending placeholder values
  • IF a page would qualify only after adding content → THEN recommend the content change first, then the markup

Guardrails

  • Never recommend markup that does not match the page's actual content
  • Never mark up ratings, prices, or reviews that do not genuinely exist
  • Do not promise rich result display

Output

A schema plan per template: recommended types, property mapping, exclusions with reasons, and prerequisites.

Definition of done

  • Every property mapped to a real content field
  • Exclusions justified
  • Prerequisites listed
← Click to close
078

Quotability Enhancer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
078

Quotability Enhancer

Purpose

Improves the sentences most likely to be quoted so that they are accurate, attributable, and stand alone.

Use when

On pages you want cited by publishers or AI answers.

Not for

Pages with no distinctive claims or data.

Inputs

  • Page content
  • Verified claims and data from the evidence plan
  • Brand fact sheet from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Identify the page's most quotable assertions: definitions, findings, and rules.
  2. Rewrite each so it holds meaning without the surrounding paragraph.
  3. Attach the source, date, or method that makes the statement verifiable.
  4. Place the strongest statement early in the relevant section.
  5. Check each statement against the brand fact sheet for consistency.

Decision rules

  • IF a statement is quotable but unverifiable → THEN add the evidence or soften the claim
  • IF a statement conflicts with the brand fact sheet → THEN align it with the fact sheet before publishing

Guardrails

  • Never write a quotable claim you cannot substantiate
  • Never manufacture statistics to appear citable
  • Do not use absolute language where the evidence is conditional

Output

A list of enhanced statements: original, rewritten, supporting evidence, and placement.

Definition of done

  • Each statement stands alone
  • Evidence attached
  • Fact sheet consistency verified
← Click to close
079

Readability & Clarity Editor

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
079

Readability & Clarity Editor

Purpose

Removes ambiguity, filler, and hedging that make a page harder to read and harder to extract.

Use when

Before publishing any page.

Not for

Legally required language that cannot be simplified.

Inputs

  • Draft content
  • Audience level from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Words to avoid list

Method

  1. Flag sentences carrying more than one idea and split them.
  2. Remove filler openings and phrases that add no information.
  3. Replace vague quantifiers with specific figures where evidence exists.
  4. Check that terminology matches the audience's level without over-explaining.
  5. Verify no prohibited words remain.

Decision rules

  • IF a vague quantifier has no supporting figure → THEN remove the claim rather than inventing a number
  • IF a term is unavoidable jargon for the audience → THEN keep it and define it once at first use

Guardrails

  • Never simplify to the point of changing meaning
  • Never invent figures to replace vague wording
  • Do not rewrite legally reviewed language

Output

An edited draft with a change summary by category: split sentences, removed filler, and clarified terms.

Definition of done

  • No prohibited words remain
  • Every vague quantifier resolved or removed
  • Meaning preserved
← Click to close
080

Comparison Table Builder

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
080

Comparison Table Builder

Purpose

Builds a table that lets a reader make a decision without reading the surrounding prose.

Use when

On comparison, pricing, and options content.

Not for

Content with no comparable dimensions.

Inputs

  • Options to compare
  • Criteria that matter to the reader
  • Verified values per option with sources

Method

  1. Select criteria the reader actually decides on, not those easiest to fill.
  2. Use identical criteria and units across every option.
  3. Enter only verified values and mark unknowns as unknown.
  4. Add a one-line summary row stating who each option suits.
  5. Add the last-verified date to the table.

Decision rules

  • IF a value cannot be verified → THEN mark it unknown rather than estimating
  • IF a criterion applies to only one option → THEN remove it or reframe it so it applies to all

Guardrails

  • Never fill gaps with assumed values
  • Never use different units or measurement bases across columns
  • Do not omit criteria where your option performs poorly

Output

A comparison table with identical criteria, verified values, unknowns marked, fit summary, and verification date.

Definition of done

  • All values sourced or marked unknown
  • Criteria consistent
  • Verification date present
← Click to close
081

List Structure Optimizer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
081

List Structure Optimizer

Purpose

Converts prose into lists where lists genuinely help, and converts false lists back into prose.

Use when

On instructional and enumerative content.

Not for

Analytical content where reasoning must be connected.

Inputs

  • Page content
  • Purpose of each section
  • Template formatting rules

Method

  1. Identify sequences, sets, and criteria currently buried in paragraphs.
  2. Convert only those where order or enumeration carries meaning.
  3. Give each list item a leading term stating what it is.
  4. Find lists whose items are full arguments and restore them to prose.
  5. Ensure every list is introduced by a sentence naming what it enumerates.

Decision rules

  • IF list items each require several sentences of reasoning → THEN convert them back to subsections with headings
  • IF a paragraph contains three or more parallel items → THEN convert it to a list

Guardrails

  • Never fragment reasoning into bullets
  • Never create lists with a single item
  • Do not use lists purely to break up page length

Output

A restructured page with each conversion noted and justified in both directions.

Definition of done

  • Every list has an introduction
  • Items carry leading terms
  • False lists converted back
← Click to close
082

Page Summary Writer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
082

Page Summary Writer

Purpose

Writes the short summary block that tells a reader, in one place, what the page concludes.

Use when

On long or technical pages.

Not for

Short pages where the summary would repeat the whole content.

Inputs

  • Full page content
  • Primary question and conclusions
  • Format rules for summary blocks

Method

  1. Extract the page's conclusions, not its topics.
  2. Write three to five statements a reader could act on without reading further.
  3. Place the summary after the opening answer, before the detail.
  4. Verify every statement is supported later in the page.
  5. Check that the summary does not introduce claims not present in the body.

Decision rules

  • IF a conclusion is not supported in the body → THEN remove it from the summary or add support to the body
  • IF the summary would exceed five statements → THEN the page likely covers more than one subject; flag it

Guardrails

  • Never introduce new claims in a summary
  • Never summarise topics instead of conclusions
  • Do not place the summary above the direct answer

Output

A summary block with statements mapped to their supporting sections.

Definition of done

  • Every statement mapped to a section
  • Conclusions, not topics
  • Placement correct
← Click to close
083

Image & Media SEO Reviewer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
083

Image & Media SEO Reviewer

Purpose

Reviews images, video, and embeds for accessibility, discoverability, and page weight.

Use when

On media-heavy pages and templates.

Not for

Creative direction on visual assets.

Inputs

  • Media inventory per page with file names, alt text, and sizes
  • Page content for context
  • Media format and size standards

Method

  1. Check alt text describes the image's informational content, not its file name.
  2. Flag decorative images carrying descriptive alt text and vice versa.
  3. Verify file naming, dimensions, and format against the standards.
  4. Check that media supporting a key claim is captioned and attributed.
  5. Identify media that could be replaced by text or a table.

Decision rules

  • IF an image carries information not stated in text → THEN require the information in text as well
  • IF an image is decorative → THEN use empty alt text rather than a description

Guardrails

  • Never describe images in alt text in a way that misrepresents them
  • Never use alt text to hold keyword lists
  • Do not require alt text on purely decorative elements

Output

A media review table: asset, issue, required change, and accessibility status.

Definition of done

  • Every asset classified as informative or decorative
  • Alt text checked against content
  • Standards compliance recorded
← Click to close
084

Conversion Support Auditor

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
084

Conversion Support Auditor

Purpose

Checks that a page gives the reader a defensible next step matched to their stage.

Use when

On pages with traffic but no measurable downstream action.

Not for

Pages deliberately built for visibility only.

Inputs

  • Page content and current calls to action
  • Stage of the reader from the journey map
  • Downstream action data if available

Method

  1. Identify the reader's stage and the next step appropriate to it.
  2. List the current calls to action and where they appear.
  3. Flag mismatches: demo requests on early-stage pages, or no step at all on decision pages.
  4. Specify one primary next step per page and where it belongs.
  5. Note supporting evidence the reader needs before taking it.

Decision rules

  • IF a page targets an early stage → THEN recommend a low-commitment next step rather than a sales action
  • IF a page has more than one competing primary action → THEN reduce it to one

Guardrails

  • Never place a high-commitment action on an early-stage page as the only option
  • Never claim conversion improvements without measurement
  • Do not add calls to action that interrupt the primary answer

Output

A next-step audit: page, stage, current actions, mismatches, and the specified primary step.

Definition of done

  • Stage identified per page
  • One primary step defined
  • Mismatches listed
← Click to close
085

Content Freshness Signal Reviewer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
085

Content Freshness Signal Reviewer

Purpose

Checks whether a page's dated content, examples, and references are still accurate.

Use when

Annually per page, or before a refresh.

Not for

Evergreen content with no dated references.

Inputs

  • Page content
  • Publication and last-update dates
  • Referenced products, versions, prices, and statistics

Method

  1. List every dated element: years, versions, prices, statistics, and screenshots.
  2. Verify each against a current source.
  3. Flag elements that are outdated, unverifiable, or now misleading.
  4. Distinguish superficial date updates from genuine content changes required.
  5. Specify the update needed per element.

Decision rules

  • IF only the displayed date is stale but content is accurate → THEN do not change the date without a real content update
  • IF a referenced product or version no longer exists → THEN update the reference and note the change

Guardrails

  • Never update a last-modified date without a substantive change
  • Never leave outdated statistics with new dates attached
  • Do not remove historical context that is deliberately dated

Output

A freshness report: element, current state, verified state, and required update.

Definition of done

  • Every dated element verified
  • Superficial updates rejected
  • Required changes specified
← Click to close
086

Definition Block Writer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
086

Definition Block Writer

Purpose

Writes the short, precise definition of a term that a page should own.

Use when

On pages targeting definitional queries or introducing a category term.

Not for

Pages where the term is already defined authoritatively elsewhere on the site.

Inputs

  • Term and its cluster
  • Entity register definition
  • Existing definitions in the market for comparison

Method

  1. Write a one-sentence definition covering the term's category and its distinguishing property.
  2. Add two or three sentences on how it works and when it applies.
  3. Note explicitly what the term is not, where confusion exists.
  4. Check consistency with the entity register and other site pages.
  5. Place the block directly under the relevant heading.

Decision rules

  • IF the site already defines the term elsewhere → THEN reuse the canonical definition and link to it
  • IF market definitions conflict → THEN state your definition and acknowledge the alternative

Guardrails

  • Never publish a definition that contradicts the entity register
  • Never define a term differently across pages
  • Do not pad definitions with marketing language

Output

A definition block with the one-sentence definition, elaboration, boundary statement, and consistency check.

Definition of done

  • Consistent with the entity register
  • Boundary stated
  • Placement specified
← Click to close
087

Evidence Placement Reviewer

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
087

Evidence Placement Reviewer

Purpose

Checks that proof sits next to the claim it supports rather than at the bottom of the page.

Use when

On pages making performance, comparison, or technical claims.

Not for

Pages with no factual claims.

Inputs

  • Page content
  • Evidence plan with claim-to-source mapping
  • Available data, examples, and citations

Method

  1. Locate every claim and the evidence currently supporting it.
  2. Flag claims whose evidence is distant, missing, or generic.
  3. Move or add evidence adjacent to each claim.
  4. Ensure each citation names the source and date inline.
  5. Remove claims that remain unsupported after the pass.

Decision rules

  • IF evidence sits in a separate section → THEN move the specific proof next to the claim and keep the detail below
  • IF a claim has no evidence available → THEN remove the claim

Guardrails

  • Never leave a factual claim without adjacent support
  • Never cite a source without naming it inline
  • Do not group all citations at the end as the only support

Output

A placement report: claim, current evidence location, action taken, and removed claims.

Definition of done

  • Every claim mapped to adjacent evidence
  • Sources named inline
  • Unsupported claims removed
← Click to close
088

Above-the-Fold Intent Match Checker

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
088

Above-the-Fold Intent Match Checker

Purpose

Verifies that the first screen confirms to the visitor that the page answers their query.

Use when

On pages with impressions and high early exit behaviour.

Not for

Pages where the format requires a long introduction by design.

Inputs

  • Page content and layout order
  • Primary query and intent
  • Behavioural data if available

Method

  1. List what appears before any scrolling: heading, first paragraph, and visual elements.
  2. Check whether the query's subject is named there in the reader's own words.
  3. Flag interruptions: large media, notices, or promotional blocks pushing the answer down.
  4. Specify the minimum content required in the first screen.
  5. Recommend the removal or relocation of interruptions.

Decision rules

  • IF the first screen does not name the query subject → THEN rewrite the opening to state it plainly
  • IF a promotional block precedes the answer → THEN move it below the first answer section

Guardrails

  • Never fill the first screen with brand messaging instead of the answer
  • Never claim behavioural improvements without measurement
  • Do not remove legally required notices

Output

A first-screen audit: current elements, intent match verdict, interruptions, and required changes.

Definition of done

  • Query subject present in the first screen
  • Interruptions listed
  • Required changes specified
← Click to close
089

Table of Contents & Jump Link Builder

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
089

Table of Contents & Jump Link Builder

Purpose

Adds navigation within long pages so readers and crawlers can reach specific sections.

Use when

On pages longer than roughly 1,500 words with multiple distinct sections.

Not for

Short pages or single-answer pages.

Inputs

  • Page heading outline
  • Section anchor availability
  • Template constraints

Method

  1. Build the contents list from the H2 outline, using the headings verbatim.
  2. Assign stable anchor identifiers that will not change on edit.
  3. Place the contents after the opening answer, not before it.
  4. Verify each anchor resolves to the correct section.
  5. Exclude sections that are not standalone destinations.

Decision rules

  • IF a heading is unclear as a navigation label → THEN fix the heading rather than writing a different label
  • IF the page has fewer than four sections → THEN omit the contents block

Guardrails

  • Never use labels that differ from the actual headings
  • Never place the contents above the direct answer
  • Do not create anchors that change with content edits

Output

A contents block with anchor identifiers, placement note, and a resolution check per link.

Definition of done

  • Labels match headings
  • Anchors stable and resolving
  • Placement after the answer
← Click to close
090

Multi-Intent Page Splitter

On-Page & Answers Click to open →
090

Multi-Intent Page Splitter

Purpose

Determines whether a page is trying to serve two intents and specifies how to split it.

Use when

When a page ranks inconsistently across its target queries or covers unrelated sections.

Not for

Pages with one clear intent and a long body.

Inputs

  • Page content and outline
  • Query performance by section topic
  • Cluster mapping for the page

Method

  1. Group the page's target queries by intent and required page type.
  2. Check whether one page format can serve all groups honestly.
  3. If not, define the split: which sections move, which stay, and what each new page owns.
  4. Specify URL treatment, redirects, and internal link updates for the split.
  5. Define what each resulting page must gain to stand alone.

Decision rules

  • IF all queries share one intent → THEN do not split; deepen the page instead
  • IF a section serves a distinct intent with its own demand → THEN move it to a new page and link between them

Guardrails

  • Never split a page ranking well across all its queries
  • Never create a new page that cannot stand alone
  • Do not split without a redirect and internal link plan

Output

A split decision: verdict, section allocation, new page specifications, URL plan, and link updates.

Definition of done

  • Intent grouping evidenced
  • Standalone viability confirmed
  • URL and link plan specified
← Click to close
091

Internal Link Strategist

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
091

Internal Link Strategist

Purpose

Treats internal links as votes rather than decoration: maps pages to query clusters and proposes links only where they are justified.

Use when

Monthly, and after publishing any batch of new pages.

Not for

Designing site navigation menus.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with internal links, depth, and anchors
  • Page to query cluster mapping
  • Body content of candidate source pages

Method

  1. Map every page to its target query cluster.
  2. Find orphan pages and pages more than three clicks deep.
  3. Propose links only where the anchor phrase already appears naturally in the source body copy.
  4. Cap outbound internal links per page at the agreed threshold.
  5. Never link two pages competing for the same primary query unless a documented strategic reason exists.

Decision rules

  • IF a candidate anchor does not appear naturally in the source copy → THEN reject the link rather than inserting forced wording
  • IF two pages target the same primary query → THEN send the link to the cannibalisation resolution path instead

Guardrails

  • Never link pages competing for the same primary query
  • Never exceed the outbound link cap to place more recommendations
  • Never insert anchors that do not fit the sentence they sit in

Output

A link plan: source URL, target URL, exact anchor, sentence location, and justification per link.

Definition of done

  • Every page mapped to a cluster
  • Orphans and deep pages listed
  • Each link has a natural anchor and stays within the cap
← Click to close
092

Orphan Page Recovery Planner

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
092

Orphan Page Recovery Planner

Purpose

Finds pages with no internal links pointing to them and decides whether to link, merge, or retire each one.

Use when

Monthly, and after migrations or bulk publishing.

Not for

Pages intentionally excluded from internal linking, such as landing pages for paid campaigns.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with inbound internal link counts
  • Sitemap and index coverage lists
  • Performance data per orphan

Method

  1. Identify indexable URLs with zero inbound internal links.
  2. Exclude intentionally unlinked pages using the protected list.
  3. Assess each remaining orphan for demand, performance, and strategic value.
  4. Assign one action per orphan: link from a relevant hub, merge, or retire.
  5. For pages to be linked, identify the specific source pages and anchors.

Decision rules

  • IF an orphan has impressions but no internal links → THEN prioritise linking it from the closest relevant hub
  • IF an orphan has no demand and no strategic value → THEN route it to the pruning skill

Guardrails

  • Never link orphans from unrelated pages to fix the count
  • Never retire an orphan without checking backlinks
  • Do not treat campaign landing pages as errors

Output

An orphan register: URL, exclusion status, evidence, assigned action, and proposed link sources.

Definition of done

  • Protected pages excluded
  • Every orphan has an action
  • Link sources named per linked page
← Click to close
093

Click Depth Reducer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
093

Click Depth Reducer

Purpose

Brings valuable pages closer to the site's main entry points through targeted structural links.

Use when

When priority pages sit deeper than three clicks.

Not for

Reducing depth of low-value archive pages.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with click depth
  • Page value tiers
  • Existing hub and navigation structure

Method

  1. List priority pages beyond depth three and their current shortest path.
  2. Identify the single link that would most reduce depth for each group.
  3. Prefer changes to shared parents over per-page links.
  4. Model the new depth distribution after the proposed changes.
  5. Check that the proposed links pass the natural anchor test.

Decision rules

  • IF many deep pages share one parent → THEN improve the parent's exposure once
  • IF depth cannot be reduced without adding navigation clutter → THEN leave it and record the trade-off

Guardrails

  • Never add navigation entries solely to reduce a depth metric
  • Never bypass topical grouping to shorten a path
  • Do not report modelled depth as measured depth

Output

A depth plan: page group, current depth, proposed change, modelled new depth, and anchor check result.

Definition of done

  • Value tiers applied
  • Shared-parent fixes preferred
  • Modelled results labelled as modelled
← Click to close
094

Hub-and-Spoke Builder

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
094

Hub-and-Spoke Builder

Purpose

Establishes the link contract between a pillar page and its supporting pages in both directions.

Use when

After publishing a topic cluster, and when a cluster underperforms as a whole.

Not for

Unrelated pages that share no topic.

Inputs

  • Topic architecture map
  • Current internal links within the cluster
  • Body content of pillar and spokes

Method

  1. Verify the pillar links to every supporting page with a descriptive anchor.
  2. Verify every supporting page links back to the pillar within body copy.
  3. Identify spoke-to-spoke links that are justified by the reader's next question.
  4. Remove or flag links between spokes that exist only for link volume.
  5. Document the contract so new spokes are linked at publication.

Decision rules

  • IF a supporting page has no body link to the pillar → THEN add one in the section where the pillar's subject is referenced
  • IF two spokes cover sequential steps → THEN link them in reading order only

Guardrails

  • Never link every spoke to every other spoke
  • Never place pillar links only in footers or sidebars
  • Do not add a spoke to a cluster without applying the contract

Output

A cluster link map with missing links, surplus links, and the documented contract for new pages.

Definition of done

  • Both directions verified
  • Surplus spoke links removed
  • Contract documented
← Click to close
095

Contextual Link Opportunity Finder

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
095

Contextual Link Opportunity Finder

Purpose

Finds existing sentences across the site where a target page could be linked naturally.

Use when

When a specific page needs more internal support.

Not for

Bulk link insertion across unrelated pages.

Inputs

  • Target URL and its primary query
  • Full-text crawl export of candidate source pages
  • Existing links to the target

Method

  1. Search body content for phrases matching the target's subject and query cluster.
  2. Exclude pages already linking to the target and pages competing with it.
  3. Rank candidate sources by topical proximity and page authority signals available.
  4. Extract the exact sentence and the anchor phrase within it.
  5. Cap the number of new links to the agreed threshold per target.

Decision rules

  • IF a candidate sentence would require rewording to fit the anchor → THEN reject it
  • IF a candidate source targets the same primary query → THEN exclude it

Guardrails

  • Never insert links into sentences that must be rewritten to accommodate them
  • Never add more links than the per-target cap
  • Do not link from pages competing for the same query

Output

An opportunity list: source URL, exact sentence, anchor phrase, proximity score, and approval status.

Definition of done

  • Sentences quoted verbatim
  • Competing pages excluded
  • Cap respected
← Click to close
096

Anchor Text Distribution Auditor

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
096

Anchor Text Distribution Auditor

Purpose

Reviews the anchors pointing to each page for descriptiveness, variety, and accuracy.

Use when

Quarterly, and after bulk additions.

Not for

External backlink anchor analysis.

Inputs

  • Internal link export with anchor text per link
  • Page to query cluster mapping
  • Anchor rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Aggregate anchors by destination page.
  2. Flag non-descriptive anchors and anchors that misdescribe the destination.
  3. Check whether anchor variety reflects the destination's cluster or a single repeated phrase.
  4. Identify anchors matching a different page's target query.
  5. Propose replacements that fit the existing sentence.

Decision rules

  • IF an anchor describes a different page's target → THEN change the anchor or the destination
  • IF all anchors to a page are identical → THEN diversify only where the sentence supports it

Guardrails

  • Never rewrite surrounding copy purely to change an anchor
  • Never use anchors that misdescribe the destination
  • Do not manufacture variety that reads unnaturally

Output

An anchor audit by destination: anchor inventory, issues, and proposed replacements with sentence context.

Definition of done

  • Every destination reviewed
  • Misdescribing anchors flagged
  • Replacements fit existing sentences
← Click to close
097

Competing Page Link Referee

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
097

Competing Page Link Referee

Purpose

Decides which of two competing pages should receive internal links, and enforces it.

Use when

When cannibalisation is detected and both pages must remain live.

Not for

Pages that are being merged.

Inputs

  • The competing URLs and their query targets
  • Performance data per URL
  • Current internal links to each

Method

  1. Confirm the two pages genuinely target the same primary query.
  2. Select the page to support using performance, intent match, and strategic role.
  3. Redirect internal links from the secondary page's anchors to the primary where the sentence allows.
  4. Retarget the secondary page to a distinct query or reduce its scope.
  5. Record the decision so future linking follows it.

Decision rules

  • IF the secondary page has stronger backlinks → THEN consider making it primary rather than splitting support
  • IF neither page can be retargeted → THEN escalate to consolidation

Guardrails

  • Never split internal support evenly between competing pages
  • Never change a target without updating the query mapping
  • Do not remove links without checking the sentence still reads correctly

Output

A referee decision: primary page, supporting evidence, link reassignments, and the secondary page's new target.

Definition of done

  • Primary page justified
  • Link reassignments listed
  • Mapping updated
← Click to close
098

Broken Internal Link Fixer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
098

Broken Internal Link Fixer

Purpose

Finds internal links pointing to broken or redirected URLs and specifies the correct destination.

Use when

Weekly on active sites.

Not for

External outbound link checking.

Inputs

  • Crawl export with link source, target, and status
  • Redirect map
  • Live URL inventory

Method

  1. List internal links resolving to 4xx, 5xx, or redirect responses.
  2. Group them by target URL to fix the cause once.
  3. For redirected targets, specify the final destination as the new link target.
  4. For broken targets, identify the closest live equivalent or remove the link.
  5. Order fixes by number of affected source pages.

Decision rules

  • IF a link points to a redirect → THEN update it to the final destination rather than leaving the hop
  • IF no relevant live equivalent exists → THEN remove the link and adjust the sentence

Guardrails

  • Never leave a sentence broken after removing a link
  • Never link to a URL that redirects when the destination is known
  • Do not fix symptoms while the source template keeps generating the link

Output

A fix list grouped by target: current target, status, new destination, affected sources, and template cause.

Definition of done

  • All links grouped by target
  • Template causes identified
  • Sentence integrity preserved
← Click to close
099

Navigation Menu Auditor

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
099

Navigation Menu Auditor

Purpose

Evaluates the main navigation for the balance between user needs and link equity distribution.

Use when

During redesigns, or when navigation has grown organically.

Not for

Body content linking.

Inputs

  • Current navigation structure
  • Page value tiers and performance
  • Crawl depth data

Method

  1. List every navigation entry and the pages it exposes.
  2. Identify high-value pages absent from navigation and low-value pages occupying slots.
  3. Assess whether labels match how visitors describe the destinations.
  4. Measure the depth effect of each navigation change considered.
  5. Recommend additions and removals with the reasoning for each.

Decision rules

  • IF a high-value section is absent from navigation → THEN propose an entry and identify what it replaces
  • IF navigation exceeds what visitors can scan → THEN recommend grouping rather than adding entries

Guardrails

  • Never add navigation entries without removing or grouping others
  • Never use labels that differ from the destination page's subject
  • Do not treat navigation as the only way to reduce depth

Output

A navigation recommendation: current entries, proposed changes, depth effect, and label revisions.

Definition of done

  • Every proposed addition has a trade-off
  • Labels validated against destinations
  • Depth effect modelled
← Click to close
100

Breadcrumb Structure Designer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
100

Breadcrumb Structure Designer

Purpose

Specifies breadcrumb trails that reflect the true hierarchy and support navigation and markup.

Use when

On sites with more than two levels of hierarchy.

Not for

Flat sites with a single level.

Inputs

  • URL structure and hierarchy map
  • Current breadcrumb implementation
  • Category taxonomy

Method

  1. Define the canonical hierarchy path for each template.
  2. Check that current breadcrumbs match that path and the URL structure.
  3. Resolve pages belonging to multiple parents by designating a primary path.
  4. Specify the markup and link behaviour for each level.
  5. Flag hierarchy conflicts between breadcrumbs, navigation, and URLs.

Decision rules

  • IF a page has multiple valid parents → THEN designate one primary path and keep the others as contextual links
  • IF breadcrumbs contradict the URL structure → THEN flag the conflict and choose one source of truth

Guardrails

  • Never show a breadcrumb path that does not exist as a navigable hierarchy
  • Never mark up breadcrumbs that differ from the visible trail
  • Do not include the current page as a link

Output

A breadcrumb specification per template with primary paths, markup rules, and conflict list.

Definition of done

  • Primary path defined per template
  • Conflicts documented
  • Markup matches visible trail
← Click to close
101

URL Hierarchy Reviewer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
101

URL Hierarchy Reviewer

Purpose

Reviews URL structure for consistency, readability, and alignment with the content hierarchy.

Use when

Before a migration or when launching a new section.

Not for

Changing URLs of established, performing pages.

Inputs

  • Full URL inventory by template
  • Content hierarchy map
  • Protected URLs from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Document the current URL patterns by template and their inconsistencies.
  2. Compare patterns against the content hierarchy and flag mismatches.
  3. Define the target pattern for each template.
  4. Separate new-page rules from existing-page changes.
  5. Recommend changes only where the benefit exceeds the migration risk.

Decision rules

  • IF an existing URL performs well but breaks the pattern → THEN leave it and apply the pattern to new pages only
  • IF a URL pattern conflicts with a protected URL rule → THEN stop and request a decision

Guardrails

  • Never change URLs of performing pages without a documented business reason
  • Never recommend URL changes without a redirect plan
  • Do not touch protected URLs listed in SEO_CONTEXT

Output

A URL standard: target pattern per template, new-page rules, change candidates, and risk notes.

Definition of done

  • Protected URLs respected
  • New-page rules separated from changes
  • Risk stated per change
← Click to close
102

Taxonomy Designer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
102

Taxonomy Designer

Purpose

Designs the category and tag system so it serves both navigation and search demand.

Use when

When categories have grown organically or overlap.

Not for

Individual page classification.

Inputs

  • Current category and tag inventory with page counts
  • Query cluster list
  • Traffic per category page

Method

  1. List every category and tag with its page count and performance.
  2. Identify overlapping, empty, and single-page classifications.
  3. Map categories to query clusters and flag those with no demand.
  4. Define the target taxonomy with rules for creating new terms.
  5. Specify merges, retirements, and redirects.

Decision rules

  • IF a tag has fewer than the minimum page count → THEN merge it into a broader term
  • IF two categories map to the same cluster → THEN merge them and redirect one

Guardrails

  • Never allow free-form tag creation without rules
  • Never retire a taxonomy term with traffic without a redirect
  • Do not create categories with no supporting content

Output

A taxonomy specification: target terms, creation rules, merge and retirement list, and redirect map.

Definition of done

  • Every current term classified
  • Creation rules written
  • Redirects specified
← Click to close
103

Faceted Link Exposure Controller

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
103

Faceted Link Exposure Controller

Purpose

Decides which filter links are exposed as crawlable anchors in the interface.

Use when

On filtered listing interfaces.

Not for

Robots directives; the technical facet skill covers those.

Inputs

  • Facet governance tiers
  • Current link markup for filters
  • Template implementation details

Method

  1. List every filter control and how it is currently rendered as a link.
  2. Compare exposure against the governance tiers.
  3. Specify which controls should be crawlable anchors and which should not.
  4. Define the implementation mechanism for non-crawlable controls.
  5. Verify indexable facet pages remain reachable by at least one crawlable path.

Decision rules

  • IF a filter is tier-blocked but rendered as a crawlable link → THEN specify a non-anchor control
  • IF an indexable facet page has no crawlable link path → THEN add one from the category page

Guardrails

  • Never leave an indexable facet page without a crawlable entry point
  • Never expose blocked facets as anchors and rely on directives alone
  • Do not change link exposure without checking current rankings

Output

An exposure specification per filter: current rendering, required rendering, mechanism, and reachability check.

Definition of done

  • Every filter mapped to a tier
  • Reachability confirmed for indexable facets
  • Mechanism specified
← Click to close
104

Internal PageRank Flow Modeler

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
104

Internal PageRank Flow Modeler

Purpose

Models how internal link equity concentrates and where it is wasted.

Use when

On large sites, before restructuring.

Not for

Small sites where the link graph is trivially small.

Inputs

  • Complete internal link graph export
  • Page value tiers
  • Current entry point distribution

Method

  1. Build the link graph and compute relative internal link scores.
  2. Compare score distribution against page value tiers.
  3. Identify high-score pages of low value and low-score pages of high value.
  4. Trace where equity is absorbed: utility pages, archives, and duplicated navigation targets.
  5. Model the effect of two or three specific structural changes.

Decision rules

  • IF a low-value page receives disproportionate internal links → THEN identify the template generating them
  • IF a high-value page has few inbound links → THEN route it to the contextual link finder

Guardrails

  • Never present modelled internal scores as external authority metrics
  • Never restructure based on the model alone without checking user needs
  • Do not include nofollowed or non-crawlable links in the graph

Output

A flow model: distribution by tier, mismatches, absorption points, and modelled effects of proposed changes.

Definition of done

  • Graph completeness verified
  • Mismatches named
  • Model clearly labelled as a model
← Click to close
105

Archive & Tag Page Auditor

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
105

Archive & Tag Page Auditor

Purpose

Determines whether archive, tag, author, and date pages earn their place in the index and the link graph.

Use when

On publisher and blog-heavy sites.

Not for

Primary category pages with demand.

Inputs

  • Inventory of archive-type URLs with performance
  • Internal link counts to and from them
  • Taxonomy specification

Method

  1. Classify archive URLs by type and count how many the site generates.
  2. Check performance and demand evidence for each type.
  3. Assess whether each type provides a discovery path not available elsewhere.
  4. Assign an action per type: keep and improve, noindex but keep crawlable, or remove.
  5. Specify how removal affects discovery of the items they list.

Decision rules

  • IF an archive type provides the only discovery path for its items → THEN keep it crawlable regardless of its own performance
  • IF an archive type has no demand and no unique discovery role → THEN recommend removal

Guardrails

  • Never remove an archive type without checking item discovery
  • Never noindex pages that are the sole crawl path to content
  • Do not treat archive volume as automatically harmful

Output

An archive decision table: type, volume, performance, discovery role, action, and discovery impact.

Definition of done

  • Discovery role assessed per type
  • Actions specified
  • Impact on item discovery documented
← Click to close
106

Link Decay Monitor

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
106

Link Decay Monitor

Purpose

Detects when pages lose internal links over time due to pagination, template changes, or content removal.

Use when

Monthly, comparing consecutive crawls.

Not for

Analysing external link loss.

Inputs

  • Current and previous internal link exports
  • Page value tiers
  • Template change log if available

Method

  1. Compare inbound internal link counts per URL between periods.
  2. Flag pages losing links beyond the agreed threshold.
  3. Identify the mechanism: content removal, pagination drift, or template change.
  4. Prioritise losses affecting high-value pages.
  5. Recommend replacement links where the loss is not intentional.

Decision rules

  • IF a page loses links because it moved off a paginated listing → THEN recommend a durable link from a hub
  • IF link loss follows intentional content removal → THEN record it and take no action

Guardrails

  • Never compare crawls with different settings
  • Never restore links that were intentionally removed
  • Do not treat all link loss as harmful

Output

A decay report: URL, previous and current link counts, mechanism, value tier, and recommended action.

Definition of done

  • Crawl settings matched
  • Mechanism identified per loss
  • Intentional removals excluded
← Click to close
107

Parent-Child Relationship Mapper

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
107

Parent-Child Relationship Mapper

Purpose

Documents which page owns which, so link direction and hierarchy decisions are consistent.

Use when

When building or restructuring a section.

Not for

Flat content sets with no hierarchy.

Inputs

  • Page inventory with topic assignment
  • Current link directions
  • URL structure

Method

  1. Assign every page a parent and record pages with none.
  2. Detect cycles and pages claimed by multiple parents.
  3. Verify the link direction matches the declared relationship.
  4. Align the hierarchy with URL structure and breadcrumbs, or document the divergence.
  5. Publish the map as the reference for future linking decisions.

Decision rules

  • IF a page has two claimed parents → THEN designate one and record the secondary relationship as contextual
  • IF link direction contradicts the hierarchy → THEN correct the links, not the hierarchy, unless the hierarchy is wrong

Guardrails

  • Never leave hierarchy undocumented on sites with more than two levels
  • Never allow cycles in the parent map
  • Do not silently diverge from the URL structure

Output

A hierarchy map: page, parent, children, conflicts resolved, and divergences documented.

Definition of done

  • Every page has a parent or is recorded as top level
  • Cycles resolved
  • Divergences documented
← Click to close
108

New Page Link Launch Checklist

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
108

New Page Link Launch Checklist

Purpose

Ensures every newly published page receives its links on the day it goes live.

Use when

At publication of any new page.

Not for

Pages already live for more than one crawl cycle.

Inputs

  • New page URL and cluster
  • Pillar and sibling pages in the cluster
  • Contextual link opportunities identified

Method

  1. Confirm the pillar links to the new page with a descriptive anchor.
  2. Confirm the new page links back to the pillar in body copy.
  3. Add the identified contextual links from existing pages.
  4. Verify sitemap inclusion and internal reachability within three clicks.
  5. Record the links added so future audits can trace them.

Decision rules

  • IF no natural anchor exists on any source page → THEN flag the page as unsupported and review its cluster fit
  • IF the page is not reachable within three clicks → THEN add a hub link before considering the launch complete

Guardrails

  • Never publish a page without at least one contextual internal link
  • Never insert forced anchors to satisfy the checklist
  • Do not rely on the sitemap as the only discovery path

Output

A launch record: links added with anchors, reachability confirmation, and any unsupported flags.

Definition of done

  • Pillar links in both directions
  • Reachable within three clicks
  • Links recorded
← Click to close
109

Footer & Sidebar Link Auditor

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
109

Footer & Sidebar Link Auditor

Purpose

Reviews site-wide template links for volume, relevance, and their effect on equity distribution.

Use when

During redesigns or when site-wide link counts are high.

Not for

Contextual body links.

Inputs

  • Template link inventory for footer, sidebar, and headers
  • Page value tiers
  • Total outbound link counts per page

Method

  1. Count site-wide links and calculate their share of total outbound links per page.
  2. Assess each link's purpose: navigation, compliance, or equity distribution.
  3. Flag links serving none of those purposes.
  4. Recommend removals and, where useful, contextual replacements.
  5. Verify compliance links remain intact.

Decision rules

  • IF a site-wide link exists purely for equity distribution → THEN replace it with contextual links from relevant pages
  • IF a site-wide link is legally required → THEN retain it regardless of volume considerations

Guardrails

  • Never remove legally required links
  • Never add site-wide links to boost specific pages
  • Do not evaluate site-wide links without measuring their share of the total

Output

A site-wide link audit: link, purpose, share of outbound links, recommendation, and compliance status.

Definition of done

  • Purpose assigned per link
  • Share measured
  • Compliance links protected
← Click to close
110

Cross-Cluster Bridge Planner

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
110

Cross-Cluster Bridge Planner

Purpose

Plans the small number of links that connect distinct topic clusters where the reader's journey requires it.

Use when

When clusters are strong individually but the site reads as disconnected silos.

Not for

Linking within a single cluster.

Inputs

  • Topic architecture map
  • Buyer journey stage mapping
  • Existing cross-cluster links

Method

  1. Identify the reader transitions that genuinely occur between clusters.
  2. Select the single best page in each cluster to serve as the bridge point.
  3. Define the anchor and the sentence context for each bridge link.
  4. Cap the number of bridges per cluster pair.
  5. Verify bridges do not connect pages competing for the same query.

Decision rules

  • IF a transition is speculative rather than observed → THEN do not build the bridge
  • IF two clusters have more than two justified bridges → THEN review whether they are actually one cluster

Guardrails

  • Never create bridge links between unrelated topics
  • Never exceed the bridge cap per cluster pair
  • Do not bridge from pages that compete for the same query

Output

A bridge plan: cluster pair, transition rationale, source and target pages, anchor, and sentence context.

Definition of done

  • Transitions evidenced
  • Cap respected
  • Competition check performed
← Click to close
111

Related Content Module Designer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
111

Related Content Module Designer

Purpose

Specifies the logic behind automated related-content modules so they support the link strategy.

Use when

When related-content modules are automated and their output is unpredictable.

Not for

Manually curated in-body links.

Inputs

  • Current module logic and sample outputs
  • Cluster mapping
  • Link cap rules

Method

  1. Document the current selection logic and sample its output across templates.
  2. Identify selections that are irrelevant or that link competing pages.
  3. Define the required selection rules: cluster proximity, exclusions, and ordering.
  4. Specify the module's link count and its contribution to the outbound cap.
  5. Define fallback behaviour when no qualifying pages exist.

Decision rules

  • IF the module surfaces a competing page → THEN add an exclusion rule for same-primary-query pages
  • IF no qualifying related pages exist → THEN hide the module rather than filling it with unrelated links

Guardrails

  • Never let automated modules link pages competing for the same query
  • Never fill modules with unrelated content to maintain a fixed count
  • Do not exclude module links from the outbound link cap

Output

A module specification: selection rules, exclusions, ordering, link count, and fallback behaviour.

Definition of done

  • Rules exclude competing pages
  • Fallback defined
  • Cap contribution accounted for
← Click to close
112

Internal Link Impact Reviewer

Internal Linking & IA Click to open →
112

Internal Link Impact Reviewer

Purpose

Checks what actually changed after a batch of internal link work, and records the result.

Use when

Four to eight weeks after implementing a link plan.

Not for

Immediately after implementation, before any data exists.

Inputs

  • The implemented link plan with dates
  • Performance data before and after
  • Crawl data showing depth and link count changes

Method

  1. Confirm which planned links were actually implemented.
  2. Compare depth, inbound link counts, and crawl frequency for affected pages.
  3. Compare performance across matched periods for affected and unaffected pages.
  4. Separate changes plausibly linked to the work from site-wide movement.
  5. Record the outcome and what it implies for the next link cycle.

Decision rules

  • IF affected and unaffected pages moved together → THEN attribute the change to site-wide factors, not the link work
  • IF implementation was partial → THEN report on implemented links only

Guardrails

  • Never claim causation without a comparison group
  • Never report results before the measurement window closes
  • Do not include unimplemented links in the results

Output

An impact review: implementation status, structural changes, matched performance comparison, and conclusion.

Definition of done

  • Implementation verified
  • Comparison group used
  • Conclusion states confidence level
← Click to close
113

Backlink Gap Analyzer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
113

Backlink Gap Analyzer

Purpose

Identifies the types of sites linking to [COMPETITORS] but not to [DOMAIN], grouped by the reason they link.

Use when

Quarterly, and before planning an outreach cycle.

Not for

Judging the value of an individual link.

Inputs

  • Backlink exports for own domain and competitors
  • Linking page context where available
  • Relevance rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Normalise the link sets to referring domains and remove duplicates.
  2. Identify domains linking to competitors only.
  3. Group them by the reason the link exists: coverage, resource listing, partnership, or data citation.
  4. Filter out domains irrelevant to your market or audience.
  5. Rank remaining groups by how repeatable the acquisition reason is.

Decision rules

  • IF a linking reason cannot be replicated honestly → THEN exclude the group from the plan
  • IF several competitors share the same linking group → THEN prioritise it as a category-level pattern

Guardrails

  • Never invent link metrics or domain scores
  • Never target links that require payment or exchange schemes
  • Do not treat volume of missing links as the objective

Output

A gap report: linking groups, acquisition reason, replicability, relevance filter results, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Links grouped by reason, not listed raw
  • Relevance filter applied
  • Non-replicable groups excluded
← Click to close
114

Link Prospect Qualifier

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
114

Link Prospect Qualifier

Purpose

Applies a consistent qualification standard so outreach targets a defensible list.

Use when

Before any outreach begins.

Not for

Evaluating links you already have.

Inputs

  • Raw prospect list with URLs
  • Qualification criteria from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Evidence of each site's audience and activity

Method

  1. Verify each site is active, has genuine readership signals, and is topically relevant.
  2. Check whether the site publishes the kind of content your asset fits.
  3. Disqualify sites showing paid-link patterns or unrelated topic mixing.
  4. Record the specific reason each prospect qualifies or fails.
  5. Assign an outreach angle to each qualified prospect.

Decision rules

  • IF a site publishes sponsored links without disclosure patterns you can verify → THEN disqualify it
  • IF a site is relevant but has no format your asset fits → THEN keep it and note the required asset

Guardrails

  • Never qualify a prospect on domain metrics alone
  • Never include sites that sell links
  • Do not proceed to outreach without a per-prospect angle

Output

A qualified prospect list: site, relevance evidence, qualification decision, reason, and outreach angle.

Definition of done

  • Every prospect has a documented reason
  • Paid-link patterns excluded
  • Angle assigned per qualified prospect
← Click to close
115

Unlinked Mention Finder

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
115

Unlinked Mention Finder

Purpose

Finds published mentions of [BRAND] that do not link back, and prepares the request.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Creating new coverage; this works with existing mentions only.

Inputs

  • Mention monitoring export with URLs and dates
  • Existing backlink list
  • Brand names and product name variants

Method

  1. Match mentions against the existing backlink list to isolate unlinked ones.
  2. Verify each mention is live, on-topic, and in a linkable context.
  3. Identify the most relevant destination URL for each mention.
  4. Prioritise by publication relevance and recency.
  5. Draft a short, specific request naming the sentence and the suggested destination.

Decision rules

  • IF a mention is negative or critical → THEN route it to communications rather than sending a link request
  • IF the mention is in a context where a link would be inappropriate → THEN skip it

Guardrails

  • Never request links on critical coverage without communications approval
  • Never send generic bulk requests
  • Do not request links to pages irrelevant to the mention

Output

A prioritised request list: mention URL, suggested destination, and the drafted request.

Definition of done

  • Existing links excluded
  • Destination relevance checked
  • Request references the specific sentence
← Click to close
116

Digital PR Angle Generator

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
116

Digital PR Angle Generator

Purpose

Generates story angles a journalist would cover, grounded in assets your business genuinely has.

Use when

At the start of a PR cycle.

Not for

Product announcements with no external interest.

Inputs

  • Available proprietary data, expertise, and customer insight
  • Target publications and their beats
  • Brand claim rules

Method

  1. Inventory what you have that others do not: data, access, experience, or a contrarian position.
  2. For each asset, write the headline a journalist would run.
  3. Test each headline against the publication's actual beat and recent coverage.
  4. Identify what would have to be produced to support the story.
  5. Discard angles requiring claims you cannot substantiate.

Decision rules

  • IF an angle depends on a claim you cannot evidence → THEN discard it
  • IF an angle has no publication whose beat it fits → THEN hold it for owned channels instead

Guardrails

  • Never build angles on manufactured or exaggerated data
  • Never pitch stories the business cannot substantiate on request
  • Do not recycle an angle a target publication recently covered

Output

An angle list: asset, proposed headline, target publications, required production, and evidence status.

Definition of done

  • Every angle tied to a real asset
  • Publication fit checked
  • Evidence status recorded
← Click to close
117

Expert Quote Package Builder

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
117

Expert Quote Package Builder

Purpose

Prepares a spokesperson's quotable material so journalist requests can be answered quickly and accurately.

Use when

Before a PR cycle, and when responding to journalist source requests.

Not for

Ghostwriting opinions the expert does not hold.

Inputs

  • Spokesperson's areas of expertise and credentials
  • Their actual positions on recurring questions
  • Approval rules from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. List the questions journalists in this field repeatedly ask.
  2. Capture the spokesperson's genuine position on each, in their words.
  3. Write two quote lengths per position: one sentence and one paragraph.
  4. Attach credentials and the evidence supporting each position.
  5. Route the package for the spokesperson's own approval before use.

Decision rules

  • IF a position has not been confirmed by the spokesperson → THEN leave it out of the package
  • IF a question falls outside their expertise → THEN record it as out of scope and name who should answer

Guardrails

  • Never attribute a position to a person who has not confirmed it
  • Never claim credentials that cannot be verified
  • Do not send quotes externally before approval

Output

An approved quote package: question, position, short and long quotes, credentials, and evidence.

Definition of done

  • Every quote confirmed by the spokesperson
  • Credentials verified
  • Out-of-scope questions listed
← Click to close
118

Journalist Pitch Writer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
118

Journalist Pitch Writer

Purpose

Writes a pitch a journalist can evaluate in fifteen seconds.

Use when

When an angle and its supporting asset are ready.

Not for

Angles without a finished supporting asset.

Inputs

  • Approved angle and supporting asset
  • Journalist's recent coverage
  • Spokesperson availability and quotes

Method

  1. Open with the finding or news, not with the company.
  2. State in one line why this journalist's readers care now.
  3. Provide the supporting evidence and how it can be verified.
  4. Offer the specific next step: data access, interview, or embargo.
  5. Keep the pitch to a length that fits on one screen.

Decision rules

  • IF the angle requires context the journalist has not covered → THEN add one line of framing, not a background section
  • IF the asset is not finished → THEN do not send the pitch

Guardrails

  • Never overstate a finding to make the pitch stronger
  • Never pitch without the asset ready to share
  • Do not send identical pitches to competing publications simultaneously without saying so

Output

A pitch: subject line, opening finding, relevance line, evidence access, and offered next step.

Definition of done

  • Finding stated first
  • Verification path included
  • Asset ready before sending
← Click to close
119

Resource Page Prospector

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
119

Resource Page Prospector

Purpose

Finds curated resource pages where your asset genuinely belongs, and prepares the submission.

Use when

When you have a resource that is objectively useful to a defined audience.

Not for

Promotional pages with no reference value.

Inputs

  • Your resource asset and its audience
  • Search patterns for resource pages in the topic
  • Qualification criteria

Method

  1. Locate resource pages covering the topic and audience your asset serves.
  2. Check what each page already lists and whether your asset adds something absent.
  3. Verify the page is maintained and its links are current.
  4. Prepare a submission naming the gap your asset fills.
  5. Record submissions so follow-up is not duplicated.

Decision rules

  • IF a resource page already lists an equivalent asset → THEN skip it unless yours covers a documented gap
  • IF a resource page has not been updated in years → THEN deprioritise it

Guardrails

  • Never submit an asset that does not fit the page's stated purpose
  • Never offer payment or reciprocal links for inclusion
  • Do not submit the same asset repeatedly to the same page

Output

A submission list: page, its current coverage, the gap your asset fills, and the prepared message.

Definition of done

  • Gap identified per page
  • Maintenance status checked
  • Submissions logged
← Click to close
120

Broken Link Opportunity Finder

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
120

Broken Link Opportunity Finder

Purpose

Finds dead references on relevant pages where your content is a genuine replacement.

Use when

When you hold content that matches a dead resource's subject.

Not for

Suggesting replacements that do not match the original.

Inputs

  • Target pages in the topic area
  • Their outbound link status
  • Your inventory of matching content

Method

  1. Identify relevant pages linking to dead resources.
  2. Determine what the dead resource covered from context and archives.
  3. Check whether your content genuinely covers the same subject at similar depth.
  4. Prepare a message reporting the broken link and offering the replacement as an option.
  5. Exclude cases where your content is not an honest equivalent.

Decision rules

  • IF your content does not match the dead resource's subject → THEN report the broken link without proposing your page
  • IF the dead resource has an official replacement → THEN point to that instead

Guardrails

  • Never claim your content replaces a resource it does not match
  • Never mass-send broken link messages without checking each case
  • Do not misrepresent the original resource's content

Output

An opportunity list: page, dead link, original subject, match assessment, and prepared message.

Definition of done

  • Original subject verified
  • Match honestly assessed
  • Non-matching cases handled without a pitch
← Click to close
121

Competitor Backlink Pattern Analyzer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
121

Competitor Backlink Pattern Analyzer

Purpose

Explains how competitors earn links, so strategy targets the mechanism rather than individual domains.

Use when

Quarterly.

Not for

Copying a competitor's link list.

Inputs

  • Competitor backlink exports with linking page context
  • Competitor content and asset inventory
  • Publication dates where available

Method

  1. Classify each competitor's links by the asset or event that caused them.
  2. Identify which assets earn links repeatedly rather than once.
  3. Determine which mechanisms are reproducible for your business.
  4. Estimate the production requirement for each reproducible mechanism.
  5. Recommend one or two mechanisms to build a programme around.

Decision rules

  • IF a mechanism depends on scale or funding you do not have → THEN exclude it and note why
  • IF a mechanism relies on paid placements → THEN exclude it entirely

Guardrails

  • Never replicate mechanisms that involve buying links
  • Never assume a link was earned by content when it may be a partnership
  • Do not report link counts without the mechanism behind them

Output

A mechanism analysis: mechanism, evidence, repeatability, production requirement, and recommendation.

Definition of done

  • Links classified by cause
  • Repeatable mechanisms separated
  • Recommendation limited to two mechanisms
← Click to close
122

Domain Authority Sanity Checker

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
122

Domain Authority Sanity Checker

Purpose

Prevents third-party authority scores from driving decisions they cannot support.

Use when

Whenever a prospect list or report is built on vendor metrics.

Not for

Sites you have direct evidence about.

Inputs

  • Prospect or report list with vendor metrics
  • Metric definitions and their source
  • Observable signals: traffic estimates, publishing activity, audience

Method

  1. Record which vendor produced each score and what it measures.
  2. Compare scores against observable signals for a sample of sites.
  3. Flag sites where the score and the observable signals disagree.
  4. Re-rank the list using observable signals as the primary criterion.
  5. State the limitation of the metric in the report.

Decision rules

  • IF a high-scoring site shows no genuine audience signals → THEN downgrade it and note the discrepancy
  • IF a low-scoring site has a highly relevant audience → THEN keep it in the plan and explain why

Guardrails

  • Never present a vendor score as an official ranking factor
  • Never rank prospects on a single third-party metric
  • Do not compare scores across different vendors

Output

A re-ranked list with vendor source, observable signals, discrepancies, and a stated metric limitation.

Definition of done

  • Metric source named
  • Sample verified against observable signals
  • Limitation stated in the output
← Click to close
123

Citation & Directory Prospector

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
123

Citation & Directory Prospector

Purpose

Identifies legitimate industry directories, associations, and databases where a listing is appropriate.

Use when

When establishing a new brand's presence or entering a new market.

Not for

Low-quality directory submissions.

Inputs

  • Business category and market
  • Industry associations and databases in the sector
  • Existing listing inventory

Method

  1. List directories and databases used by the audience or industry, not by SEO tools.
  2. Verify each is maintained and its listings are used by real visitors.
  3. Check eligibility requirements and the information needed.
  4. Prepare consistent listing information matching the brand fact sheet.
  5. Record submissions and their status for future consistency checks.

Decision rules

  • IF a directory accepts any submission without review → THEN exclude it
  • IF a directory requires membership or accreditation → THEN route it to the business owner for a decision

Guardrails

  • Never submit to directories that exist only to sell links
  • Never submit inconsistent business information
  • Do not create listings for locations or services that do not exist

Output

A listing plan: directory, eligibility, required information, submission status, and consistency check.

Definition of done

  • Directories verified as genuinely used
  • Information matches the brand fact sheet
  • Submissions logged
← Click to close
124

Partnership Link Mapper

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
124

Partnership Link Mapper

Purpose

Finds the links that should already exist from existing business relationships.

Use when

Annually, and after signing new partners or customers.

Not for

Cold outreach to strangers.

Inputs

  • List of partners, customers, integrations, suppliers, and sponsorships
  • Existing backlink list
  • Relationship owner per account

Method

  1. List every existing relationship and check whether a link exists in either direction.
  2. Identify pages where a mention would be natural: partner directories, case studies, integration pages.
  3. Confirm each relationship allows public reference.
  4. Route each opportunity to the relationship owner with a specific ask.
  5. Track status and record where public reference is not permitted.

Decision rules

  • IF a relationship is under a confidentiality agreement → THEN exclude it and record the restriction
  • IF a partner page exists but omits your brand → THEN route a specific correction request to the relationship owner

Guardrails

  • Never publish a customer or partner reference without permission
  • Never approach partners directly without informing the relationship owner
  • Do not imply relationships that are not current

Output

A relationship link map: account, link status both ways, natural placement, owner, and permission status.

Definition of done

  • Permission verified per account
  • Owner assigned per request
  • Restrictions recorded
← Click to close
125

Guest Contribution Planner

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
125

Guest Contribution Planner

Purpose

Plans contributed articles that are worth publishing on their merits.

Use when

When you have expertise a publication's audience genuinely needs.

Not for

Mass guest posting for links.

Inputs

  • Target publications and their contributor guidelines
  • Available expertise and data
  • Editorial calendar capacity

Method

  1. Identify publications whose audience overlaps your ICP and that accept contributions.
  2. Study their recent coverage to find the gap your expertise fills.
  3. Propose a specific topic, not a general offer to write.
  4. Confirm the piece can be written to their standard within capacity.
  5. Define what the article gives the reader independently of any link.

Decision rules

  • IF the topic is one your own site should own → THEN publish it yourself instead
  • IF a publication accepts any contribution without editorial review → THEN exclude it

Guardrails

  • Never submit content whose only purpose is a link
  • Never publish the same article on multiple sites
  • Do not pursue publications with no editorial standard

Output

A contribution plan: publication, audience fit, proposed topic, reader value, and capacity check.

Definition of done

  • Audience overlap evidenced
  • Topic specific to the publication
  • Capacity confirmed
← Click to close
126

Data Story Designer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
126

Data Story Designer

Purpose

Designs a research or data asset that publications have a reason to cite.

Use when

When you hold data others cannot access, or can collect it credibly.

Not for

Repackaging publicly available statistics.

Inputs

  • Available proprietary data or collection capability
  • Questions the market argues about
  • Methodology and privacy constraints

Method

  1. Identify the question your data can answer that no one else can.
  2. Define the method, sample, and limitations before analysis.
  3. Determine the finding formats a publication could cite directly.
  4. Plan the supporting materials: methodology page, charts, and raw figures.
  5. Set the update cadence if the asset is intended to become a reference.

Decision rules

  • IF the data cannot support the intended claim → THEN narrow the claim to what the data shows
  • IF the sample is too small to generalise → THEN state the limitation prominently or do not publish the finding

Guardrails

  • Never publish findings the method cannot support
  • Never omit sample size, method, or date
  • Never publish data that identifies individuals or breaches privacy commitments

Output

A data asset specification: question, method, limitations, citable findings, supporting materials, and cadence.

Definition of done

  • Method and limitations documented before analysis
  • Findings match what the data supports
  • Privacy review completed
← Click to close
127

Link Reclamation Auditor

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
127

Link Reclamation Auditor

Purpose

Recovers links lost to redirects, removed pages, or site changes.

Use when

Quarterly, and after any migration.

Not for

Acquiring new links.

Inputs

  • Current backlink export with target URL status
  • Previous backlink export for comparison
  • Redirect map

Method

  1. Identify backlinks pointing to URLs that are broken, redirected, or removed.
  2. Group them by target and by cause.
  3. Fix what you control: restore redirects or reinstate pages where appropriate.
  4. For links removed at the source, verify the removal and decide whether to ask.
  5. Prioritise by the linking page's relevance and reach.

Decision rules

  • IF a backlink points to a 404 you created → THEN restore a redirect to the closest equivalent immediately
  • IF a link was removed during a source-site redesign → THEN send a specific request referencing the original context

Guardrails

  • Never redirect a linked URL to an unrelated page
  • Never claim a link was removed without verifying against a prior export
  • Do not chase links from sources that are no longer relevant

Output

A reclamation list: backlink, target status, cause, fix applied or request drafted, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Every broken target grouped by cause
  • Self-inflicted losses fixed first
  • Requests reference specific context
← Click to close
128

Outreach Sequence Writer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
128

Outreach Sequence Writer

Purpose

Writes the message sequence for a qualified prospect list without generic templates.

Use when

After prospects are qualified and an asset exists.

Not for

Unqualified or purchased lists.

Inputs

  • Qualified prospect list with per-prospect angles
  • The asset being offered
  • Sending rules and volume limits

Method

  1. Write the first message around the recipient's specific published work.
  2. State what you are offering and why it fits that work in two sentences.
  3. Define one follow-up only, with new information rather than a reminder.
  4. Set the stop rule: no response after the follow-up ends the sequence.
  5. Define the personalisation fields that must be filled per prospect.

Decision rules

  • IF personalisation cannot be filled for a prospect → THEN remove them from the sequence
  • IF a recipient declines → THEN stop immediately and record it

Guardrails

  • Never send more than one follow-up
  • Never use false urgency or fabricated familiarity
  • Do not contact recipients who have declined or opted out

Output

A sequence: first message, single follow-up, personalisation fields, stop rules, and volume limits.

Definition of done

  • Personalisation fields defined and fillable
  • Stop rules stated
  • Volume limits respected
← Click to close
129

Link Velocity Reviewer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
129

Link Velocity Reviewer

Purpose

Reviews the pace and pattern of link acquisition to detect anomalies and set realistic expectations.

Use when

Quarterly.

Not for

Setting link quantity targets.

Inputs

  • Backlink acquisition data over time
  • Content and PR activity dates
  • Competitor acquisition pattern if available

Method

  1. Plot referring domain acquisition by month across the available history.
  2. Mark the content, PR, and product events that coincide with movement.
  3. Identify unexplained spikes and investigate their source.
  4. Compare the pattern with the activity that produced it to find what works.
  5. State what the pattern implies for planning, without projecting exact numbers.

Decision rules

  • IF a spike has no matching activity → THEN investigate for scraper networks or unsolicited placements
  • IF acquisition is flat despite activity → THEN review whether the assets are genuinely citable

Guardrails

  • Never set link quantity targets as a primary objective
  • Never assume a spike is positive without inspecting the sources
  • Do not forecast link acquisition as a fixed number

Output

A velocity review: acquisition timeline, mapped activity, unexplained movement, and planning implications.

Definition of done

  • Activity mapped to timeline
  • Unexplained spikes investigated
  • No numeric forecast presented
← Click to close
130

Anchor Diversity Auditor

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
130

Anchor Diversity Auditor

Purpose

Reviews inbound anchor text for patterns that look engineered rather than earned.

Use when

Quarterly, and after any outreach campaign.

Not for

Internal anchor review.

Inputs

  • Backlink export with anchor text
  • Target page mapping
  • Historical anchor distribution if available

Method

  1. Aggregate inbound anchors per target page and classify them by type.
  2. Compare the distribution against what naturally earned links look like for the page type.
  3. Flag exact-match concentrations and unnatural repetition.
  4. Identify which campaigns or sources produced the concentration.
  5. Recommend adjustments to future outreach rather than retroactive manipulation.

Decision rules

  • IF exact-match anchors dominate a page's profile → THEN change future outreach practice and stop requesting anchors
  • IF anchors come from a single network of sites → THEN investigate the source before taking any other action

Guardrails

  • Never request specific anchor text in outreach
  • Never attempt to manipulate existing anchors at scale
  • Do not disavow links based on anchor distribution alone

Output

An anchor profile report: distribution by type and page, concentrations identified, sources, and practice changes.

Definition of done

  • Distribution classified by type
  • Sources of concentration identified
  • Recommendations are forward-looking
← Click to close
131

Toxic Link Review Protocol

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
131

Toxic Link Review Protocol

Purpose

Provides a conservative process for reviewing suspicious links before considering any action.

Use when

When a manual action is received or a clear link scheme is discovered.

Not for

Routine housekeeping of ordinary low-quality links.

Inputs

  • Backlink export
  • Any manual action notice received
  • History of past link-building activity

Method

  1. Establish whether there is a documented problem: a manual action or evidence of a scheme.
  2. If neither exists, stop and take no action.
  3. If a problem exists, classify links by whether they were procured or unsolicited.
  4. For procured links, attempt removal at the source and document each attempt.
  5. Consider disavowal only after removal attempts, and document the reasoning.

Decision rules

  • IF there is no manual action and no known scheme → THEN take no action and document the conclusion
  • IF links were procured by a previous agency → THEN prioritise removal at the source before any disavowal

Guardrails

  • Never disavow links speculatively
  • Never use third-party toxicity scores as the basis for action
  • Do not disavow links you did not procure without documented evidence of harm

Output

A review record: problem evidence, link classification, removal attempts, and the action decision with reasoning.

Definition of done

  • Documented problem confirmed before any action
  • Removal attempted before disavowal
  • Decision reasoning recorded
← Click to close
132

Newsworthiness Scorer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
132

Newsworthiness Scorer

Purpose

Scores a proposed story before production so effort goes to angles with genuine coverage potential.

Use when

Before committing production resources to a PR asset.

Not for

Evergreen content planning.

Inputs

  • Proposed angle and supporting evidence
  • Target publication beats
  • Recent coverage of similar stories

Method

  1. Score the angle on novelty, relevance to a current conversation, evidence strength, and audience size.
  2. Check whether the same story has been covered recently and by whom.
  3. Assess whether a journalist could write the story from the materials alone.
  4. Produce a go, revise, or drop verdict with the deciding factor named.
  5. For revise verdicts, state the specific change required.

Decision rules

  • IF the story has been covered in the last quarter → THEN revise the angle or drop it
  • IF a journalist would need to do additional research to write it → THEN add the missing materials before pitching

Guardrails

  • Never score an angle without checking recent coverage
  • Never inflate novelty by narrowing the claim beyond what the data supports
  • Do not proceed with drop verdicts on stakeholder preference alone

Output

A score sheet: dimension scores, recent coverage check, verdict, deciding factor, and required revisions.

Definition of done

  • Recent coverage checked
  • Verdict states the deciding factor
  • Revisions specified
← Click to close
133

Original Research Survey Designer

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
133

Original Research Survey Designer

Purpose

Designs a survey that produces defensible, citable findings.

Use when

When no existing data answers a question your market argues about.

Not for

Surveys designed to produce a predetermined conclusion.

Inputs

  • The research question
  • Available audience for sampling
  • Privacy and consent requirements

Method

  1. State the question and the hypotheses before writing any survey item.
  2. Design questions that avoid leading wording and forced-choice bias.
  3. Define the sample frame, target size, and how representativeness will be described.
  4. Specify the analysis plan and the limitations to be published.
  5. Plan the methodology page that will accompany every published finding.

Decision rules

  • IF the achievable sample cannot support generalisation → THEN publish it as an indicative sample and label it clearly
  • IF a question could be read as leading → THEN rewrite it before fielding

Guardrails

  • Never write questions designed to produce a desired answer
  • Never publish findings without sample size, method, and date
  • Never collect personal data without consent and a stated purpose

Output

A survey specification: question, hypotheses, items, sample frame, analysis plan, limitations, and methodology page.

Definition of done

  • Hypotheses stated before item writing
  • Sample frame documented
  • Limitations drafted before fielding
← Click to close
134

Press Coverage Tracker

Authority & Digital PR Click to open →
134

Press Coverage Tracker

Purpose

Tracks earned coverage over time and connects it to the assets and pitches that produced it.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Tracking brand mentions inside AI answers; the AI visibility skills cover that.

Inputs

  • Coverage monitoring export
  • Pitch and asset log with dates
  • Publication tiers or relevance classification

Method

  1. Collect coverage for the period with publication, date, and link status.
  2. Match each item to the pitch, asset, or event that likely produced it.
  3. Separate earned coverage from syndication and republication.
  4. Report coverage by publication relevance rather than by volume alone.
  5. Identify which assets produced repeat coverage.

Decision rules

  • IF coverage cannot be matched to any pitch or asset → THEN record it as unattributed rather than assigning it
  • IF an item is syndicated from another publication → THEN count the original once and note the syndication

Guardrails

  • Never count syndicated copies as separate coverage
  • Never attribute coverage to a pitch without evidence
  • Do not report coverage volume without relevance classification

Output

A coverage report: items with publication, date, link status, attributed source, and syndication notes.

Definition of done

  • Syndication separated
  • Attribution evidenced or marked unattributed
  • Relevance classification applied
← Click to close
135

Business Profile Auditor

Local SEO Click to open →
135

Business Profile Auditor

Purpose

Audits a business profile listing for completeness, accuracy, and consistency with the website.

Use when

Quarterly per location, and after any business change.

Not for

Managing customer reviews; separate skills cover that.

Inputs

  • Current profile export or screenshots per location
  • Website business information
  • Brand fact sheet from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Check every field for completeness and compare it against the website.
  2. Verify name, address, phone, hours, and service descriptions match exactly.
  3. Identify fields left empty that the business could legitimately complete.
  4. Flag information that is outdated, duplicated, or inconsistent across locations.
  5. Produce the correction list with the exact replacement values.

Decision rules

  • IF profile information conflicts with the website → THEN designate the website as the source of truth unless the business says otherwise
  • IF a field cannot be completed truthfully → THEN leave it empty rather than approximating

Guardrails

  • Never enter keywords into the business name field
  • Never list hours, services, or addresses that are not accurate
  • Do not create profiles for locations without a genuine presence

Output

A per-location correction list: field, current value, required value, and source of truth.

Definition of done

  • Every field compared against the website
  • Corrections give exact values
  • No speculative entries
← Click to close
136

Local Category Selector

Local SEO Click to open →
136

Local Category Selector

Purpose

Chooses the primary and secondary listing categories that match what the business actually does.

Use when

At listing creation, and when services change.

Not for

Keyword targeting on the website.

Inputs

  • Service list per location
  • Available category taxonomy
  • Competitor category choices where visible

Method

  1. List the services each location genuinely delivers.
  2. Match them to the closest available categories in the taxonomy.
  3. Select one primary category reflecting the core service.
  4. Add secondary categories only where the service is genuinely offered.
  5. Document the reasoning so category changes can be reviewed later.

Decision rules

  • IF no category exactly matches the service → THEN choose the closest accurate one rather than a broader popular one
  • IF a competitor uses a category you do not qualify for → THEN do not copy it

Guardrails

  • Never select categories for services the location does not provide
  • Never change the primary category without recording the previous value and date
  • Do not add categories purely because competitors use them

Output

A category assignment per location: primary, secondaries, reasoning, and previous values.

Definition of done

  • Every category tied to a real service
  • Primary category justified
  • Change history recorded
← Click to close
137

Service Area Definition Skill

Local SEO Click to open →
137

Service Area Definition Skill

Purpose

Defines the geographic area a location genuinely serves and how it is expressed across the site and listings.

Use when

For service-area businesses, and when coverage changes.

Not for

Businesses serving customers only at a physical address.

Inputs

  • Actual service coverage by location
  • Travel or delivery constraints
  • Current declared service areas

Method

  1. Establish the real coverage boundary from operational constraints, not ambition.
  2. Express the boundary in the terms customers use: cities, regions, or postal areas.
  3. Compare it against currently declared areas and flag overreach.
  4. Define how coverage is presented on the site and in listings consistently.
  5. Record the review date for coverage changes.

Decision rules

  • IF a declared area exceeds actual coverage → THEN reduce the declaration and note the customer impact
  • IF coverage differs by service → THEN declare it per service rather than as one boundary

Guardrails

  • Never declare service areas the business cannot serve
  • Never create separate pages for areas without genuine coverage
  • Do not list every nearby town to widen apparent reach

Output

A service area definition per location: boundary, expression, corrections to current declarations, and review date.

Definition of done

  • Boundary based on operational reality
  • Overreach corrected
  • Consistent expression across channels
← Click to close
138

Local Landing Page Builder

Local SEO Click to open →
138

Local Landing Page Builder

Purpose

Specifies a location page that contains genuinely local information rather than a templated substitution.

Use when

When a location genuinely warrants its own page.

Not for

Generating pages for areas with no presence.

Inputs

  • Location details, staff, and services
  • Local proof: projects, customers, or partnerships
  • Local query cluster

Method

  1. Confirm the location has enough unique information to justify a page.
  2. Specify the required unique content: local team, local proof, local service detail, and directions.
  3. Define what is shared from the template and what must be written per location.
  4. Specify local structured data and contact details.
  5. Set the minimum unique content threshold below which no page is created.

Decision rules

  • IF a location cannot meet the unique content threshold → THEN do not create the page; fold it into a regional page
  • IF two locations share the same service and team → THEN create one page covering both

Guardrails

  • Never publish location pages differing only by a place name
  • Never claim a physical presence that does not exist
  • Do not duplicate service descriptions across location pages

Output

A location page specification: required unique content, shared elements, structured data, and the threshold rule.

Definition of done

  • Threshold applied before creation
  • Unique content specified per location
  • No template-substitution pages
← Click to close
139

Local Keyword Researcher

Local SEO Click to open →
139

Local Keyword Researcher

Purpose

Builds the query set for a location using local phrasing and real service demand.

Use when

Before building or refreshing local pages.

Not for

National keyword research.

Inputs

  • Service list for the location
  • Local language and naming conventions
  • Demand evidence where available

Method

  1. Collect the terms locals use for the service, including regional variations.
  2. Combine services with location names in the patterns people actually type.
  3. Separate queries where the searcher wants a nearby provider from research queries.
  4. Map each query to the page that should serve it.
  5. Flag queries with no supporting page and no plan.

Decision rules

  • IF a query uses a regional term unfamiliar elsewhere → THEN use the local term on the local page only
  • IF a query is research-oriented → THEN map it to national content rather than the location page

Guardrails

  • Never invent local search volumes
  • Never use place names the local audience does not use
  • Do not map research queries to location pages

Output

A local query map: query, local phrasing note, intent, mapped page, and gaps.

Definition of done

  • Local phrasing verified
  • Intent separated
  • Gaps listed
← Click to close
140

Review Sentiment Analyzer

Local SEO Click to open →
140

Review Sentiment Analyzer

Purpose

Turns review text into operational themes rather than a star average.

Use when

Monthly per location.

Not for

Responding to individual reviews.

Inputs

  • Review export with text, rating, and date
  • Location and service mapping
  • Prior period themes for comparison

Method

  1. Extract the specific subject of each review comment, positive and negative.
  2. Group comments into recurring themes and count their frequency.
  3. Compare theme frequency against the previous period.
  4. Identify themes tied to a specific location, staff group, or service.
  5. Route each theme to the owner who can act on it.

Decision rules

  • IF a negative theme grows across two periods → THEN escalate it as an operational issue rather than a review problem
  • IF a theme appears at one location only → THEN route it to that location's manager

Guardrails

  • Never summarise reviews as a single score
  • Never attribute reviews to named individuals in a published report
  • Do not generalise a single review into a theme

Output

A theme report per location: theme, frequency, trend, example excerpts, and assigned owner.

Definition of done

  • Themes derived from text, not ratings
  • Trend comparison included
  • Owners assigned
← Click to close
141

Review Response Writer

Local SEO Click to open →
141

Review Response Writer

Purpose

Drafts responses that address the specific issue raised without templated language.

Use when

For every review requiring a response.

Not for

Disputing a customer's account of events.

Inputs

  • Review text, rating, and date
  • Known facts about the visit or order
  • Response policy and approval rules

Method

  1. Identify the specific issue or compliment in the review.
  2. Acknowledge it in the reviewer's own terms without repeating a stock phrase.
  3. State what will happen next where an action is warranted.
  4. Route responses involving disputed facts or compensation to the approval owner.
  5. Keep the response shorter than the review.

Decision rules

  • IF a review alleges something you cannot verify → THEN acknowledge, offer a direct channel, and do not dispute publicly
  • IF a review appears fraudulent → THEN route it to the reporting process rather than responding with accusations

Guardrails

  • Never dispute a customer's experience publicly
  • Never disclose personal or order details in a public response
  • Never offer compensation without approval

Output

A drafted response per review with the identified issue, the action stated, and the approval flag.

Definition of done

  • Issue addressed specifically
  • No personal details disclosed
  • Approval flags applied
← Click to close
142

Citation Consistency Auditor

Local SEO Click to open →
142

Citation Consistency Auditor

Purpose

Checks that the business appears identically across the directories and databases that carry its details.

Use when

Quarterly, and after any address, name, or phone change.

Not for

Finding new directories to submit to.

Inputs

  • Master business information from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Existing citation inventory
  • Current values found on each platform

Method

  1. Compare each platform's listing field by field against the master record.
  2. Record every discrepancy with its exact current value.
  3. Prioritise discrepancies in name, address, and phone above other fields.
  4. Identify listings that cannot be edited and note the escalation path.
  5. Produce the correction queue with platform-specific instructions.

Decision rules

  • IF a discrepancy exists in the address or phone → THEN treat it as high priority regardless of the platform's traffic
  • IF a listing cannot be claimed → THEN record the escalation path rather than leaving it unresolved

Guardrails

  • Never guess which version of the information is correct
  • Never create duplicate listings to bypass an unclaimable one
  • Do not correct listings without the verified master record

Output

A discrepancy queue: platform, field, current value, correct value, priority, and access status.

Definition of done

  • Master record verified first
  • Every discrepancy recorded exactly
  • Access status noted per platform
← Click to close
143

NAP Discrepancy Finder

Local SEO Click to open →
143

NAP Discrepancy Finder

Purpose

Finds where the business name, address, or phone number varies across the website itself.

Use when

Before a citation cleanup, and after rebranding or relocation.

Not for

Third-party platform listings.

Inputs

  • Crawl export including footer, contact, and location page content
  • Master business information
  • Structured data output

Method

  1. Extract every instance of name, address, and phone from the site.
  2. Compare each against the master record, including formatting.
  3. Check structured data values against the visible values.
  4. Identify templates producing the inconsistency rather than individual pages.
  5. Specify the single source the site should render these values from.

Decision rules

  • IF formatting differs but the data is correct → THEN standardise formatting and note it as low risk
  • IF structured data conflicts with visible content → THEN treat it as high priority

Guardrails

  • Never correct site data before confirming the master record
  • Never leave structured data and visible content in conflict
  • Do not fix individual pages when a template is the cause

Output

A discrepancy report: location on site, current value, correct value, template cause, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Structured and visible values compared
  • Template causes identified
  • Single source specified
← Click to close
144

Local Competitor Analyzer

Local SEO Click to open →
144

Local Competitor Analyzer

Purpose

Compares your local presence against the businesses actually appearing for your local queries.

Use when

Quarterly per priority location.

Not for

National competitive analysis.

Inputs

  • Local query list and observed local results
  • Competitor profile and website information
  • Your own local presence data

Method

  1. Record which businesses appear for the priority local queries.
  2. Compare profile completeness, category selection, review volume, and local content.
  3. Identify what those businesses have that you do not, factually.
  4. Separate factors you can act on from those you cannot.
  5. Produce the actionable difference list per location.

Decision rules

  • IF a competitor's advantage is proximity to the searcher → THEN record it as non-actionable and focus on the rest
  • IF a competitor has substantially more local content → THEN prioritise the content gap

Guardrails

  • Never fabricate competitor review counts or profile details
  • Never recommend fake reviews or fake locations to compete
  • Do not treat proximity factors as failures to fix

Output

A local comparison per location: competitors present, factual differences, actionable items, and priorities.

Definition of done

  • Observations recorded, not assumed
  • Actionable and non-actionable separated
  • Priorities per location
← Click to close
145

Multi-Location Architecture Planner

Local SEO Click to open →
145

Multi-Location Architecture Planner

Purpose

Designs the URL and page structure for a business with many locations.

Use when

Before launching multiple locations, or when the current structure is inconsistent.

Not for

Single-location businesses.

Inputs

  • Location inventory with services per location
  • Current URL structure
  • Growth plan for new locations

Method

  1. Define the hierarchy: country, region, city, and location, using only the levels the business needs.
  2. Specify the URL pattern and how new locations slot into it.
  3. Define which content lives at each level to avoid duplication.
  4. Specify the internal link contract between levels.
  5. Define the process for adding and retiring a location.

Decision rules

  • IF a region has one location → THEN skip the regional level rather than creating a page with one child
  • IF services differ by location → THEN hold service content at the location level, not the regional level

Guardrails

  • Never create hierarchy levels with a single child page
  • Never duplicate identical service copy across every location page
  • Do not leave the location retirement process undefined

Output

An architecture specification: hierarchy, URL patterns, content allocation by level, link contract, and lifecycle process.

Definition of done

  • Hierarchy justified by location count
  • Content allocation prevents duplication
  • Lifecycle process defined
← Click to close
146

Location Governance Rulebook

Local SEO Click to open →
146

Location Governance Rulebook

Purpose

Sets the rules controlling what individual locations may change and what stays centrally managed.

Use when

For franchises and multi-location brands.

Not for

Single-location businesses.

Inputs

  • Location list with ownership model
  • Current inconsistencies across locations
  • Brand and legal requirements

Method

  1. Define which elements are centrally controlled and which are location-editable.
  2. Write the standard for each location-editable element with examples.
  3. Define the approval path for exceptions.
  4. Specify the audit cadence and who performs it.
  5. Provide the onboarding checklist for a new location.

Decision rules

  • IF a location requests an exception to a central rule → THEN route it through the documented approval path, not local judgement
  • IF an element causes recurring inconsistency → THEN move it to central control

Guardrails

  • Never leave brand-critical fields editable without a standard
  • Never allow locations to alter legally required information
  • Do not write rules without an audit mechanism

Output

A governance document: control matrix, standards with examples, approval path, audit cadence, and onboarding checklist.

Definition of done

  • Every element assigned to central or local control
  • Standards include examples
  • Audit cadence defined
← Click to close
147

Local Schema Builder

Local SEO Click to open →
147

Local Schema Builder

Purpose

Specifies structured data for locations that matches the visible page content.

Use when

When building or auditing location pages.

Not for

Marking up locations without dedicated pages.

Inputs

  • Location page content
  • Verified business details
  • Current markup if present

Method

  1. Map each required property to a visible element on the location page.
  2. Specify address, contact, hours, and area served using verified values.
  3. Exclude properties the page does not display.
  4. Ensure consistency with the profile listing and the site's NAP data.
  5. Specify how markup updates when hours or details change.

Decision rules

  • IF a property has no visible equivalent on the page → THEN add the content or omit the property
  • IF hours vary seasonally → THEN specify how exceptions are represented rather than omitting them

Guardrails

  • Never mark up information not visible on the page
  • Never mark up aggregate ratings the page does not display
  • Do not leave markup static when the underlying data changes

Output

A markup specification per location template: property mapping, exclusions, consistency checks, and update rules.

Definition of done

  • Every property mapped to visible content
  • Consistency with listings verified
  • Update mechanism defined
← Click to close
148

Map Pack Visibility Reviewer

Local SEO Click to open →
148

Map Pack Visibility Reviewer

Purpose

Reviews local map visibility across the service area and identifies the factors within your control.

Use when

Quarterly per priority location.

Not for

Guaranteeing map placement.

Inputs

  • Observed local results across sample points in the service area
  • Profile completeness and review data
  • Competitor presence data

Method

  1. Record observed visibility across multiple sample points rather than from one location.
  2. Compare visibility patterns against distance from the business address.
  3. Identify controllable factors: profile completeness, categories, reviews, and local content.
  4. Separate them from uncontrollable factors such as proximity.
  5. Recommend actions on controllable factors only.

Decision rules

  • IF visibility drops consistently with distance → THEN record it as expected and focus on controllable factors
  • IF visibility is weak near the address → THEN prioritise profile and category review

Guardrails

  • Never claim a specific map position can be guaranteed
  • Never recommend creating listings at addresses you do not occupy
  • Do not draw conclusions from observations at a single point

Output

A visibility review: sample-point observations, distance pattern, controllable factors, and recommended actions.

Definition of done

  • Multiple sample points used
  • Controllable factors isolated
  • No placement guarantees
← Click to close
149

Local FAQ Builder

Local SEO Click to open →
149

Local FAQ Builder

Purpose

Builds location-specific answers to the questions customers actually ask before visiting or calling.

Use when

When location pages lack practical information.

Not for

Generic company FAQs.

Inputs

  • Questions from calls, messages, and reviews per location
  • Verified operational details
  • Location page content

Method

  1. Collect the questions each location actually receives.
  2. Separate questions with location-specific answers from those with company-wide answers.
  3. Write concise, verified answers for location-specific questions.
  4. Place them on the location page, not the company FAQ.
  5. Set a review cadence tied to operational changes.

Decision rules

  • IF a question has the same answer at every location → THEN move it to the company FAQ and link from the location page
  • IF an answer depends on details that change often → THEN state the source rather than a fixed value

Guardrails

  • Never publish operational details that have not been verified with the location
  • Never duplicate the same FAQ block across all location pages
  • Do not answer questions the location cannot commit to

Output

A location FAQ set: questions, verified answers, placement, and the review cadence.

Definition of done

  • Questions sourced from real enquiries
  • Answers verified with the location
  • Company-wide questions separated
← Click to close
150

Local Content Angle Generator

Local SEO Click to open →
150

Local Content Angle Generator

Purpose

Finds content topics that are genuinely local rather than a national topic with a place name added.

Use when

When location pages need supporting content.

Not for

National topic planning.

Inputs

  • Local market characteristics and regulations
  • Local customer questions and projects
  • Local events and partnerships

Method

  1. Identify what differs about the service in this location: regulations, conditions, pricing structures, or seasons.
  2. Collect local proof: projects, customers, partnerships, and events.
  3. Generate topics that only this location could write credibly.
  4. Discard topics that would read identically for another city.
  5. Map each surviving topic to a local query where demand exists.

Decision rules

  • IF a topic would read identically with another place name substituted → THEN discard it
  • IF a topic is credible but has no local search demand → THEN keep it for the location page rather than a standalone article

Guardrails

  • Never produce location content by substituting place names
  • Never reference local projects or customers without permission
  • Do not claim local expertise the location does not have

Output

A local topic list: topic, what makes it location-specific, supporting proof, and mapped query.

Definition of done

  • Substitution test applied to every topic
  • Proof identified
  • Query mapping recorded
← Click to close
151

Duplicate Listing Detector

Local SEO Click to open →
151

Duplicate Listing Detector

Purpose

Finds duplicate or outdated listings that split visibility and confuse customers.

Use when

Quarterly, and after moves, rebrands, or acquisitions.

Not for

Creating new listings.

Inputs

  • Listing inventory across platforms
  • Historical addresses, names, and phone numbers
  • Current verified location list

Method

  1. Search each platform for all listings matching the brand, its former names, and its addresses.
  2. Identify duplicates, outdated entries, and listings for closed locations.
  3. Determine which listing should be retained per location.
  4. Specify the resolution per duplicate: merge, mark closed, or request removal.
  5. Record ownership and access status for each.

Decision rules

  • IF two listings exist for the same location → THEN retain the one with the established history and merge the other
  • IF a listing exists for a closed location → THEN mark it closed rather than deleting it

Guardrails

  • Never delete a listing with established review history without merging
  • Never leave closed locations listed as open
  • Do not create a new listing to replace a duplicate you cannot access

Output

A duplicate register: platform, listings found, retained listing, resolution action, and access status.

Definition of done

  • Former names and addresses searched
  • Retained listing chosen per location
  • Actions specified per duplicate
← Click to close
152

Local Conversion Readiness Auditor

Local SEO Click to open →
152

Local Conversion Readiness Auditor

Purpose

Checks that a local visitor can complete the action they came for without friction.

Use when

On location pages with visibility but few calls, bookings, or visits.

Not for

National conversion optimisation.

Inputs

  • Location page content and layout
  • Available contact and booking methods
  • Enquiry data if available

Method

  1. Confirm the primary local actions are visible without scrolling on mobile.
  2. Verify phone numbers, booking links, and directions work and reach the right location.
  3. Check that hours, parking, and access information are present and current.
  4. Identify friction: forms requiring unnecessary fields or missing contact options.
  5. Specify the changes required, ordered by the action they unblock.

Decision rules

  • IF a phone number routes to a central line without location context → THEN recommend location routing or an explicit note
  • IF hours or access details are missing → THEN treat it as a blocking gap rather than an enhancement

Guardrails

  • Never publish contact routes that have not been tested
  • Never claim conversion improvements without measurement
  • Do not remove accessibility information to simplify a page

Output

A readiness audit: action, current state, tested result, friction found, and required changes.

Definition of done

  • Contact routes tested
  • Practical details verified
  • Changes ordered by unblocked action
← Click to close
153

Profile Post & Update Planner

Local SEO Click to open →
153

Profile Post & Update Planner

Purpose

Plans a sustainable cadence of listing updates that carry genuine information.

Use when

When listing updates are sporadic or purely promotional.

Not for

Website content planning.

Inputs

  • Location activity: offers, events, changes, and news
  • Posting capacity per location
  • Brand and claim rules

Method

  1. Identify the categories of update the business genuinely produces.
  2. Set a cadence each location can sustain without inventing content.
  3. Define the required elements per update: subject, detail, and next step.
  4. Assign ownership per location and a review step for claims.
  5. Define what to do when there is nothing genuine to post.

Decision rules

  • IF a location has no genuine update in the period → THEN skip the post rather than publishing filler
  • IF an update contains a pricing or availability claim → THEN route it through the review step first

Guardrails

  • Never publish promotional claims that have not been reviewed
  • Never post content that misrepresents availability or pricing
  • Do not set a cadence the locations cannot sustain

Output

An update plan: categories, cadence, required elements, owners, review step, and the skip rule.

Definition of done

  • Cadence matched to capacity
  • Ownership assigned
  • Skip rule stated
← Click to close
154

Local Link & Sponsorship Finder

Local SEO Click to open →
154

Local Link & Sponsorship Finder

Purpose

Identifies local organisations and events where genuine involvement earns visibility and links.

Use when

When building local authority for a location.

Not for

Buying placements on unrelated local directories.

Inputs

  • Location and its community context
  • Existing local relationships and memberships
  • Budget and involvement capacity

Method

  1. List local organisations, associations, events, and institutions relevant to the business.
  2. Identify where the business already has a genuine relationship.
  3. Assess which involvements are realistic given capacity and budget.
  4. Prepare the specific approach per opportunity, naming the contribution offered.
  5. Record outcomes and the resulting visibility.

Decision rules

  • IF an opportunity requires payment with no genuine involvement → THEN treat it as advertising and evaluate it as such
  • IF an existing relationship has no public reference → THEN start there before pursuing new ones

Guardrails

  • Never buy links disguised as sponsorships
  • Never claim community involvement that is not genuine
  • Do not pursue opportunities the business cannot honour

Output

An opportunity list: organisation, relationship status, contribution offered, capacity check, and outcome.

Definition of done

  • Existing relationships checked first
  • Capacity verified
  • Paid placements classified as advertising
← Click to close
155

Prompt Universe Builder

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
155

Prompt Universe Builder

Purpose

Builds the standing set of prompts that represent how buyers actually ask AI systems about your category.

Use when

Before any AI visibility measurement begins, then reviewed quarterly.

Not for

Traditional keyword research.

Inputs

  • ICP definition and buyer problems from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Real questions from sales, support, and search data
  • Category and competitor names

Method

  1. Write prompts in the phrasing buyers use with an assistant, not in keyword form.
  2. Cover five types: category discovery, comparison, problem-solving, brand-specific, and validation.
  3. Include prompts where your brand should appear and prompts where it plausibly should not.
  4. Fix the wording of each prompt so results stay comparable over time.
  5. Assign each prompt a priority tier and a review date.

Decision rules

  • IF a prompt returns a different subject each time it is run → THEN rewrite it until it is stable enough to compare
  • IF a prompt names your brand only → THEN keep it in the brand tier and do not count it as category visibility

Guardrails

  • Never treat prompts as keywords or attach search volume to them
  • Never change prompt wording mid-cycle without recording the change
  • Do not build a prompt set only from prompts you expect to win

Output

A prompt universe: prompt text, type, priority tier, market, language, and review date.

Definition of done

  • All five prompt types represented
  • Wording locked and versioned
  • Prompts where you should not appear included
← Click to close
156

Brand Mention Checker

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
156

Brand Mention Checker

Purpose

Checks whether [BRAND] appears in AI answers for a defined prompt set, and records how it appears.

Use when

On a fixed recurring cadence against the prompt universe.

Not for

Measuring website rankings.

Inputs

  • Prompt universe with locked wording
  • Engines to be checked
  • Brand names and product name variants

Method

  1. Run each prompt on each engine using the locked wording and record the full answer.
  2. Record for each answer whether the brand is mentioned, cited with a link, or absent.
  3. Record the position of the mention within the answer and its context.
  4. Note which competitors appear in answers where you do not.
  5. Store the raw answer text with the date and engine for later comparison.

Decision rules

  • IF the brand is mentioned without a citation → THEN record it as a mention, not a citation, and note the distinction
  • IF an answer varies between runs of the same prompt → THEN record both runs rather than choosing one

Guardrails

  • Never report a mention you have not captured in raw output
  • Never combine results from different engines into one figure without labelling them
  • Do not paraphrase answers in the record; store what was returned

Output

A mention log: prompt, engine, date, mention status, citation status, position, context, and competitors present.

Definition of done

  • Every prompt run on every listed engine
  • Raw answers stored with dates
  • Mentions and citations recorded separately
← Click to close
157

Citation Source Analyzer

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
157

Citation Source Analyzer

Purpose

Identifies which sources AI answers cite for your priority prompts, and who controls them.

Use when

Monthly, after the mention check.

Not for

Analysing your own site's backlinks.

Inputs

  • Captured answers with their cited sources
  • Prompt universe with tiers
  • Competitor and own domain lists

Method

  1. Extract every cited source from the captured answers.
  2. Classify each source: own site, competitor, publisher, community, directory, or institution.
  3. Count citation frequency by source and by prompt type.
  4. Identify the sources cited across many prompts, which act as category references.
  5. Note which sources you can influence, contribute to, or only observe.

Decision rules

  • IF a source is cited across many prompts → THEN treat it as a category reference and prioritise presence on it
  • IF a source is a competitor's own content → THEN record it and route it to the content gap analysis

Guardrails

  • Never claim a source influences an engine's answers beyond what the citations show
  • Never fabricate a citation list from expectation
  • Do not treat a single citation as a pattern

Output

A source register: source, type, citation count, prompts cited on, influence level, and access path.

Definition of done

  • Sources extracted from captured answers only
  • Classification applied
  • Influence level assigned
← Click to close
158

AI Competitor Monitor

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
158

AI Competitor Monitor

Purpose

Tracks which competitors appear in AI answers for your prompt set and how they are described.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Traditional competitive rank tracking.

Inputs

  • Captured answers across the prompt set
  • Competitor list from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Previous period's competitor record

Method

  1. Extract every brand named in each answer, including brands not on your competitor list.
  2. Count appearance frequency by competitor and by prompt type.
  3. Record the attributes each competitor is credited with.
  4. Compare against the previous period to identify entrants and drop-offs.
  5. Flag brands appearing frequently that are not currently tracked as competitors.

Decision rules

  • IF an unlisted brand appears frequently → THEN add it to the tracked set and inform the business
  • IF a competitor is credited with an attribute you also have → THEN route it to the brand fact and content skills

Guardrails

  • Never assume a named brand is a competitor without confirming with the business
  • Never report competitor frequency without stating the prompt set used
  • Do not compare periods that used different prompt wording

Output

A competitor appearance report: brand, frequency, prompt types, credited attributes, and period change.

Definition of done

  • All named brands extracted
  • Attributes recorded verbatim
  • Prompt set and wording version stated
← Click to close
159

Answer Comparison Agent

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
159

Answer Comparison Agent

Purpose

Compares how different engines answer the same prompt, and what that reveals about source preference.

Use when

Monthly, on the priority prompt tier.

Not for

Deciding which engine is best.

Inputs

  • Captured answers for the same prompts across engines
  • Cited sources per answer
  • Prompt tier definitions

Method

  1. Place answers to the same prompt side by side by engine.
  2. Compare which brands, sources, and claims each includes.
  3. Identify claims present in one engine's answer and absent in others.
  4. Note structural differences: list versus narrative, cited versus uncited.
  5. Summarise where your visibility differs by engine and what sources explain it.

Decision rules

  • IF one engine cites you and others do not → THEN examine the source it cites and whether the others reference it
  • IF engines disagree on a factual claim about your brand → THEN route it to the brand fact consistency skill

Guardrails

  • Never average results across engines into a single score without showing the components
  • Never assume engines share the same source coverage
  • Do not draw conclusions from a single prompt

Output

A comparison matrix: prompt, engine, brands present, sources cited, claims, and structural notes.

Definition of done

  • Same prompt wording used across engines
  • Differences named specifically
  • Conclusions based on multiple prompts
← Click to close
160

AI Visibility Scorecard

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
160

AI Visibility Scorecard

Purpose

Turns the captured measurements into a stable scorecard that can be compared period to period.

Use when

Monthly, after collection is complete.

Not for

Replacing the underlying measurement.

Inputs

  • Mention log for the period
  • Citation and competitor records
  • Prompt universe version

Method

  1. Define the metrics: mention rate, citation rate, competitor co-occurrence, and prompt coverage.
  2. Calculate each metric per engine and per prompt tier separately.
  3. State the prompt universe version and any changes since the last period.
  4. Compare against the previous period only where the prompt set is unchanged.
  5. Note the sample size behind every figure.

Decision rules

  • IF the prompt set changed since the last period → THEN report the new baseline and do not present a trend
  • IF a metric is based on fewer than ten prompts → THEN report it with the sample size and mark it indicative

Guardrails

  • Never present a blended score without its components
  • Never compare periods with different prompt sets
  • Do not report percentages without the underlying counts

Output

A scorecard: metrics by engine and tier, sample sizes, prompt version, and period comparison where valid.

Definition of done

  • Sample sizes shown
  • Prompt version recorded
  • Invalid comparisons suppressed
← Click to close
161

Citation Gap Finder

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
161

Citation Gap Finder

Purpose

Finds the sources cited for your priority prompts where your brand is absent but could legitimately be present.

Use when

Monthly, after source analysis.

Not for

Generic link prospecting.

Inputs

  • Source register with citation frequency
  • Your presence status on each source
  • Contribution and inclusion rules per source

Method

  1. List frequently cited sources where your brand is not present.
  2. Determine how presence is obtained on each: listing, contribution, review, or editorial coverage.
  3. Assess eligibility and effort per source honestly.
  4. Rank sources by citation frequency across priority prompts and by feasibility.
  5. Assign each source an owner and a route to presence.

Decision rules

  • IF a source requires editorial coverage → THEN route it to the digital PR skills rather than treating it as a listing task
  • IF a source excludes your category or business type → THEN record it as unavailable and move on

Guardrails

  • Never attempt to manipulate a source's content to insert your brand
  • Never buy placements on sources presented as neutral references
  • Do not claim eligibility you have not verified

Output

A gap list: source, citation frequency, presence route, eligibility, effort, owner, and priority.

Definition of done

  • Presence route identified per source
  • Eligibility verified
  • Ownership assigned
← Click to close
162

Source Authority Analyzer

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
162

Source Authority Analyzer

Purpose

Assesses which cited sources carry the most influence across your prompt set, so effort is not spread evenly.

Use when

Quarterly.

Not for

Judging a source's SEO authority metrics.

Inputs

  • Source register with citation counts
  • Prompt tier and engine breakdown
  • Source characteristics: type, update frequency, editorial model

Method

  1. Rank sources by citation frequency weighted by prompt priority.
  2. Identify sources cited across multiple engines rather than one.
  3. Record each source's update frequency and editorial model.
  4. Separate sources that reflect consensus from those that create it.
  5. Recommend the three sources where presence would affect the most priority prompts.

Decision rules

  • IF a source is cited by one engine only → THEN rank it below cross-engine sources of similar frequency
  • IF a source aggregates other sources → THEN trace the upstream source and evaluate that instead

Guardrails

  • Never equate citation frequency with editorial quality
  • Never rank sources on third-party authority metrics alone
  • Do not recommend more than three focus sources per cycle

Output

A weighted source ranking with cross-engine presence, editorial model, upstream tracing, and three focus recommendations.

Definition of done

  • Weighting method stated
  • Cross-engine presence recorded
  • Focus limited to three sources
← Click to close
163

Brand Fact Consistency Checker

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
163

Brand Fact Consistency Checker

Purpose

Checks whether AI answers describe your brand accurately and consistently with your own approved facts.

Use when

Monthly, and immediately after any positioning or product change.

Not for

Correcting competitor descriptions.

Inputs

  • Approved brand fact sheet from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Captured answers mentioning the brand
  • Public sources describing the brand

Method

  1. Extract every factual claim made about your brand in the captured answers.
  2. Compare each against the approved fact sheet.
  3. Classify each as accurate, outdated, incomplete, or incorrect.
  4. Trace incorrect claims to the public sources most likely carrying them.
  5. Specify the corrections needed at the source, not at the engine.

Decision rules

  • IF a claim is outdated → THEN identify which public source still carries the old information and correct it there
  • IF a claim is incorrect and traceable to your own site → THEN prioritise the on-site correction immediately

Guardrails

  • Never attempt to correct an engine's output directly
  • Never publish corrections that conflict with the approved fact sheet
  • Do not assume the source of an incorrect claim without evidence

Output

A fact audit: claim, engine, classification, likely source, and the correction action with owner.

Definition of done

  • Every claim classified
  • Sources traced or marked unknown
  • Corrections targeted at sources
← Click to close
164

Assistant Answer Readiness Auditor

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
164

Assistant Answer Readiness Auditor

Purpose

Assesses whether a page can be read, understood, and used as a source by an AI assistant.

Use when

Before publishing key pages, and when a page fails to earn citations.

Not for

Traditional on-page ranking review.

Inputs

  • Page content and structure
  • Target prompts the page should serve
  • Entity register and fact sheet

Method

  1. Check whether the page states its subject, scope, and audience explicitly.
  2. Verify each section answers one question completely and independently.
  3. Check that claims carry sources, dates, and methods where relevant.
  4. Confirm entity names match the register and are used consistently.
  5. Test whether the page's key passages make sense when read alone.

Decision rules

  • IF a passage requires the surrounding page to make sense → THEN rewrite it to stand alone
  • IF a claim has no attributable source → THEN add the source or remove the claim

Guardrails

  • Never claim a page will be cited as a result of these changes
  • Never add unsupported claims to appear more authoritative
  • Do not restructure a page that is already cited without recording the before state

Output

A readiness report: criterion, current state, required change, and a before-state record.

Definition of done

  • All five criteria assessed
  • Changes specified per criterion
  • Before state recorded
← Click to close
165

LLM Chunk Readiness Reviewer

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
165

LLM Chunk Readiness Reviewer

Purpose

Examines how a page divides into self-contained chunks and whether each chunk carries enough context.

Use when

On long reference pages intended to be cited.

Not for

Short single-answer pages.

Inputs

  • Page content with heading structure
  • Target questions per section
  • Entity naming rules

Method

  1. Divide the page at its heading boundaries and treat each section as a standalone unit.
  2. Check whether each unit names its subject rather than relying on the page title.
  3. Flag units whose meaning depends on a table, image, or list elsewhere.
  4. Ensure defined terms are introduced within the unit or linked.
  5. Rewrite the opening sentence of each unit to carry its subject and claim.

Decision rules

  • IF a unit depends on a table located in another section → THEN restate the key figures within the unit or move the table
  • IF a unit is shorter than two sentences → THEN merge it with an adjacent unit

Guardrails

  • Never repeat the entire page context in every section
  • Never split content into fragments to increase the number of chunks
  • Do not remove tables or lists that carry the information

Output

A chunk review: unit, self-containment verdict, dependency, and the rewritten opening sentence.

Definition of done

  • Every unit assessed
  • Dependencies named
  • Openings carry subject and claim
← Click to close
166

Answer Engine Prompt Coverage Mapper

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
166

Answer Engine Prompt Coverage Mapper

Purpose

Maps which of your pages could serve each prompt in the universe, and where nothing exists.

Use when

After building the prompt universe, and quarterly thereafter.

Not for

Query to URL mapping for traditional search.

Inputs

  • Prompt universe
  • Site page inventory with subjects
  • Captured answers showing which pages are cited

Method

  1. For each prompt, identify the page that should be the natural source of the answer.
  2. Record prompts with no candidate page.
  3. Record prompts where a page exists but is not cited.
  4. Distinguish coverage gaps from readiness gaps.
  5. Route each gap to the correct skill: content creation or answer readiness.

Decision rules

  • IF no page exists for a priority prompt → THEN route it to the content backlog as a coverage gap
  • IF a page exists but is never cited → THEN route it to the answer readiness auditor

Guardrails

  • Never map a prompt to a page that does not genuinely answer it
  • Never treat every uncited page as readiness failure without checking coverage first
  • Do not create new pages for prompts an existing page could serve

Output

A coverage map: prompt, candidate page, citation status, gap type, and routed skill.

Definition of done

  • Every priority prompt mapped or marked as a gap
  • Gap type distinguished
  • Routing specified
← Click to close
167

AI Overview Exposure Mapper

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
167

AI Overview Exposure Mapper

Purpose

Records which of your target queries trigger AI-generated summaries in search results and what they contain.

Use when

Monthly on the priority query set.

Not for

Standard rank tracking.

Inputs

  • Priority query list
  • Observed search results for those queries
  • Own page mapping per query

Method

  1. Record for each query whether an AI summary appears and capture it.
  2. Record which sources the summary references and whether yours is among them.
  3. Note what the summary asserts and whether it satisfies the query fully.
  4. Compare the summary's content against your mapped page's coverage.
  5. Flag queries where the summary answers completely and clicks are unlikely.

Decision rules

  • IF a summary appears and cites a competitor → THEN compare the cited page against yours on completeness and structure
  • IF a summary fully answers the query → THEN reassess the query's click expectations and success metric

Guardrails

  • Never claim to know how summaries select sources
  • Never report summary presence without capturing it on a date
  • Do not assume summary content is stable between checks

Output

An exposure map: query, summary present, captured content, sources cited, your presence, and click implication.

Definition of done

  • Observations captured with dates
  • Source lists recorded
  • Click implications stated per query
← Click to close
168

Recurring Prompt Monitor

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
168

Recurring Prompt Monitor

Purpose

Runs the prompt universe on a fixed schedule so that changes in AI visibility are detectable.

Use when

On the agreed cadence, without variation.

Not for

One-off exploratory checks.

Inputs

  • Locked prompt universe
  • Engine list and access method
  • Previous period's raw records

Method

  1. Run every priority prompt on every engine using identical wording and settings.
  2. Store raw answers with prompt version, engine, date, and market.
  3. Compute the period's mention and citation rates from the raw records.
  4. Compare with the previous period and flag changes beyond the variance band.
  5. Record any deviation from the standard procedure.

Decision rules

  • IF a change exceeds the variance band → THEN flag it for investigation rather than reporting it as a trend
  • IF an engine was unavailable during collection → THEN record the gap rather than substituting another date

Guardrails

  • Never change prompts, engines, or settings mid-cycle without recording it
  • Never fill missing collection dates with estimates
  • Do not report changes within the variance band as movement

Output

A monitoring record: raw answers, computed rates, flagged changes, and a procedure deviation log.

Definition of done

  • Identical wording and settings used
  • Raw records stored
  • Deviations logged
← Click to close
169

Prompt Opportunity Discovery

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
169

Prompt Opportunity Discovery

Purpose

Finds prompts you are not yet tracking where your brand could legitimately appear.

Use when

Quarterly.

Not for

Expanding the prompt set to inflate visibility rates.

Inputs

  • Existing prompt universe
  • Customer questions from support and sales
  • Category and problem vocabulary

Method

  1. Collect questions customers ask that are absent from the prompt universe.
  2. Convert them into assistant-style prompts in the customer's phrasing.
  3. Test each prompt once to see whether your category appears at all.
  4. Assess whether your brand is a legitimate answer for the prompt.
  5. Add qualifying prompts to the universe with a tier and a start date.

Decision rules

  • IF your brand is not a legitimate answer to a prompt → THEN do not add it to the tracked set
  • IF a prompt returns no category-relevant answer at all → THEN record it as a category-level gap rather than a brand gap

Guardrails

  • Never add prompts solely because you already win them
  • Never remove prompts from the universe because performance is poor
  • Do not backdate newly added prompts into historical figures

Output

A prompt addition list: prompt, source question, legitimacy assessment, tier, and start date.

Definition of done

  • Legitimacy assessed per prompt
  • Start dates recorded
  • No retroactive inclusion
← Click to close
170

AI Share of Voice Tracker

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
170

AI Share of Voice Tracker

Purpose

Measures your presence in AI answers relative to the other brands appearing for the same prompts.

Use when

Monthly, using the same prompt set as the mention check.

Not for

Measuring traditional market share.

Inputs

  • Mention log with all brands named per answer
  • Prompt universe with tiers
  • Competitor list

Method

  1. Count brand appearances per prompt and per engine across the period.
  2. Calculate each brand's share of total brand appearances within the prompt set.
  3. Break the calculation down by prompt tier and by engine.
  4. State the prompt set and the period in every figure reported.
  5. Compare with the prior period only where the prompt set is unchanged.

Decision rules

  • IF one prompt dominates the appearance count → THEN report the tier breakdown so the concentration is visible
  • IF a brand appears in an answer as a negative example → THEN record the context and exclude it from favourable share

Guardrails

  • Never present share of voice as market share
  • Never calculate share across engines without showing each engine
  • Do not include prompts added mid-period in the comparison

Output

A share report: brand shares by engine and tier, prompt set version, period, and context notes.

Definition of done

  • Prompt set version stated
  • Breakdown by engine and tier
  • Context of negative mentions recorded
← Click to close
171

Source Recency Reviewer

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
171

Source Recency Reviewer

Purpose

Checks whether the sources describing your brand and category are current enough to be relied on.

Use when

Quarterly, and after any major product or positioning change.

Not for

Updating your own page dates.

Inputs

  • Source register with citation frequency
  • Publication and update dates per source
  • Current brand fact sheet

Method

  1. Record the last update date of each frequently cited source.
  2. Identify sources describing your brand with outdated information.
  3. Determine whether you can request or submit an update on each.
  4. Prioritise by citation frequency and by the severity of the outdated claim.
  5. Track the request and its outcome per source.

Decision rules

  • IF a frequently cited source carries outdated pricing or product facts → THEN prioritise it above lower-frequency sources
  • IF a source cannot be updated → THEN plan to publish a current, citable alternative

Guardrails

  • Never edit third-party sources without permission or the correct process
  • Never claim an engine will pick up an update on a specific timeline
  • Do not treat an old publication date as automatically incorrect

Output

A recency report: source, last update, outdated claims, update route, priority, and status.

Definition of done

  • Update dates verified
  • Outdated claims identified specifically
  • Update route recorded
← Click to close
172

Structured Data for AI Answers Planner

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
172

Structured Data for AI Answers Planner

Purpose

Specifies the machine-readable information that makes your entities and facts unambiguous.

Use when

After the entity map exists and page content is stable.

Not for

Chasing rich results in traditional search.

Inputs

  • Entity register
  • Page content by template
  • Existing markup inventory

Method

  1. Identify the entities and facts that must be unambiguous: organisation, products, people, and definitions.
  2. Map each to the page that defines it and the markup type that expresses it.
  3. Ensure names, descriptions, and relationships match the entity register exactly.
  4. Connect entities across pages using consistent identifiers.
  5. Specify how each value updates when the underlying fact changes.

Decision rules

  • IF markup would state a fact not visible on the page → THEN add the content first
  • IF two pages describe the same entity → THEN designate one as the definition page and reference it from the other

Guardrails

  • Never mark up facts that are not on the page
  • Never use different descriptions for the same entity across templates
  • Do not claim markup guarantees inclusion in AI answers

Output

An entity markup plan: entity, definition page, markup type, property values, identifiers, and update rules.

Definition of done

  • Values match the entity register
  • Definition pages designated
  • Update rules specified
← Click to close
173

Recommendation Pattern Analyzer

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
173

Recommendation Pattern Analyzer

Purpose

Examines the reasons AI answers give when recommending a brand in your category.

Use when

Quarterly, on comparison and recommendation prompts.

Not for

Prompts where no recommendation is made.

Inputs

  • Captured answers containing recommendations
  • Competitor list
  • Your own positioning claims

Method

  1. Extract the criteria the answers use to justify each recommendation.
  2. Count how often each criterion appears across answers.
  3. Record which brand is credited with each criterion.
  4. Compare the criteria used against your own positioning claims.
  5. Identify criteria where you qualify but are not credited.

Decision rules

  • IF you qualify for a criterion but are not credited → THEN check whether public sources state it and route it to content or PR
  • IF a criterion dominates the answers and you do not qualify → THEN record it as a positioning decision for the business

Guardrails

  • Never infer selection logic beyond what the answers state
  • Never claim qualification for a criterion without evidence
  • Do not report criteria frequency from a handful of answers

Output

A criteria analysis: criterion, frequency, credited brands, your qualification status, and routed action.

Definition of done

  • Criteria extracted verbatim
  • Qualification evidenced
  • Actions routed to owners
← Click to close
174

Sentiment & Framing Analyzer

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
174

Sentiment & Framing Analyzer

Purpose

Assesses how favourably and in what frame your brand is described when it appears.

Use when

Monthly, alongside the mention check.

Not for

Counting mentions.

Inputs

  • Captured answers mentioning the brand
  • Approved positioning from SEO_CONTEXT
  • Previous period's framing record

Method

  1. Classify each mention as favourable, neutral, unfavourable, or conditional.
  2. Record the frame: which use case, audience, or limitation the brand is attached to.
  3. Compare the frame with your intended positioning.
  4. Identify recurring qualifiers or caveats attached to your brand.
  5. Trace persistent negative framings to their likely public sources.

Decision rules

  • IF a caveat recurs across engines → THEN treat it as a source-level issue rather than a phrasing coincidence
  • IF the frame is favourable but attached to the wrong use case → THEN route it to positioning and content, not to reputation

Guardrails

  • Never report sentiment without the underlying quotes
  • Never attribute a framing to a source without evidence
  • Do not treat a single unfavourable mention as a trend

Output

A framing report: mention, classification, frame, recurring caveats, source hypothesis, and quoted evidence.

Definition of done

  • Every classification supported by a quote
  • Frames compared with intended positioning
  • Recurring caveats identified
← Click to close
175

Third-Party Source Placement Planner

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
175

Third-Party Source Placement Planner

Purpose

Plans presence on the independent sources that AI answers rely on for your category.

Use when

After the citation gap analysis identifies target sources.

Not for

Placement on sources that sell inclusion.

Inputs

  • Prioritised citation gap list
  • Eligibility requirements per source
  • Available assets: data, reviews, expertise

Method

  1. Group target sources by the type of presence required: listing, review, contribution, or coverage.
  2. Define the asset or action each type requires from your team.
  3. Assign owners and realistic timelines per source.
  4. Define what accurate information must be supplied and who verifies it.
  5. Track submission status and the outcome per source.

Decision rules

  • IF a source requires customer reviews → THEN route it to the customer team with a compliant request process
  • IF a source charges for inclusion in a neutral comparison → THEN exclude it and record the reason

Guardrails

  • Never pay for inclusion in sources presented as independent
  • Never incentivise reviews in ways the platform prohibits
  • Do not submit information that has not been verified

Output

A placement plan: source, presence type, required asset, owner, timeline, verification step, and status.

Definition of done

  • Presence type defined per source
  • Owners and timelines assigned
  • Paid-inclusion sources excluded
← Click to close
176

Entity Consistency Auditor

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
176

Entity Consistency Auditor

Purpose

Checks that your brand's identity is described consistently everywhere it appears publicly.

Use when

Quarterly, and after rebranding or repositioning.

Not for

On-page entity clarity; the on-page skill covers that.

Inputs

  • Approved brand fact sheet
  • List of public profiles, databases, and directories
  • Current values found on each

Method

  1. Collect the brand description, category, founding details, and product names from every public source.
  2. Compare each against the approved fact sheet.
  3. Record discrepancies and the source carrying them.
  4. Prioritise sources by citation frequency in AI answers.
  5. Specify the correction path per source and its owner.

Decision rules

  • IF a widely cited source carries an outdated description → THEN prioritise it above less-cited sources
  • IF sources disagree on a basic fact → THEN publish the authoritative version on your own site first

Guardrails

  • Never publish a description that differs from the approved fact sheet
  • Never change historical facts to improve positioning
  • Do not correct third-party sources without following their process

Output

A consistency report: source, current description, approved version, discrepancy, priority, and correction path.

Definition of done

  • All listed sources checked
  • Discrepancies recorded exactly
  • Correction paths specified
← Click to close
177

AI Visibility Incident Response

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
177

AI Visibility Incident Response

Purpose

Provides the response procedure when an AI answer states something damaging or incorrect about your brand.

Use when

When an incorrect or damaging claim is discovered.

Not for

Routine visibility fluctuations.

Inputs

  • The captured answer with date, engine, and prompt
  • Approved brand facts
  • Communications and legal escalation contacts

Method

  1. Capture the answer verbatim with prompt, engine, date, and reproduction steps.
  2. Verify whether the claim is factually incorrect or unfavourable but accurate.
  3. Trace the likely public sources carrying the claim.
  4. Escalate to communications or legal where the claim is defamatory or regulatory.
  5. Correct the source information and record the date for re-checking.

Decision rules

  • IF the claim is accurate but unfavourable → THEN route it to the business as an operational or positioning issue, not a correction request
  • IF the claim originates from your own published content → THEN correct it immediately and record the change date

Guardrails

  • Never publish claims about engine behaviour you cannot substantiate
  • Never attempt to manipulate third-party content to remove a claim
  • Do not escalate externally without the communications owner's approval

Output

An incident record: captured evidence, verification, source trace, escalation status, corrections, and re-check date.

Definition of done

  • Evidence captured with reproduction steps
  • Accuracy verified before response
  • Escalation path followed
← Click to close
178

Multi-Market AI Visibility Comparator

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
178

Multi-Market AI Visibility Comparator

Purpose

Compares AI visibility across markets and languages so investment follows the actual gaps.

Use when

Quarterly for businesses operating in more than one market.

Not for

Single-market analysis.

Inputs

  • Prompt universes per market and language
  • Mention and citation logs by market
  • Market priority from SEO_CONTEXT

Method

  1. Confirm each market's prompt set is equivalent in intent, not translated word for word.
  2. Compare mention and citation rates by market and language.
  3. Identify sources cited in one market that have no equivalent presence in another.
  4. Separate differences caused by content coverage from those caused by source presence.
  5. Rank markets by gap size weighted by business priority.

Decision rules

  • IF a market's prompt set is a literal translation → THEN rebuild it with local phrasing before comparing
  • IF a market has coverage but no citations → THEN investigate local source presence rather than content volume

Guardrails

  • Never compare markets whose prompt sets are not intent-equivalent
  • Never assume a source influential in one market matters in another
  • Do not aggregate markets into a single visibility figure

Output

A market comparison: rates by market, source differences, gap causes, and priority-weighted ranking.

Definition of done

  • Prompt equivalence verified
  • Causes separated
  • Priority weighting applied
← Click to close
179

AI Traffic & Referral Reader

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
179

AI Traffic & Referral Reader

Purpose

Reads referral and analytics data for visits arriving from AI assistants, without overstating what it proves.

Use when

Monthly, alongside the visibility scorecard.

Not for

Attributing revenue to AI visibility.

Inputs

  • Analytics export with referrer and source data
  • Known assistant referrer patterns
  • Landing page inventory

Method

  1. Identify sessions whose referrer matches a known assistant source.
  2. Report volume, landing pages, and behaviour separately from organic search.
  3. Compare which landing pages receive assistant referrals against your citation records.
  4. Note the limits: many assistant visits carry no identifiable referrer.
  5. Report trends only where the measurement method is unchanged.

Decision rules

  • IF referral volume is small → THEN report absolute numbers rather than percentages
  • IF a landing page receives referrals but is not in your citation record → THEN investigate which prompts surface it

Guardrails

  • Never present assistant referral data as the total AI-driven traffic
  • Never attribute conversions to AI visibility without a tracked path
  • Do not merge assistant referrals into organic search totals

Output

A referral report: volume, landing pages, behaviour, comparison with citation records, and stated measurement limits.

Definition of done

  • Assistant traffic reported separately
  • Limits stated explicitly
  • Absolute numbers given
← Click to close
180

AI Visibility Executive Brief

AI Search Visibility Click to open →
180

AI Visibility Executive Brief

Purpose

Condenses the AI visibility programme into a brief a leadership team can act on.

Use when

Monthly or quarterly, after the scorecard is complete.

Not for

Replacing the detailed analysis.

Inputs

  • Scorecard for the period
  • Competitor, citation, and framing reports
  • Prior brief for continuity

Method

  1. Open with what changed since the last brief and the evidence for it.
  2. Report the three metrics leadership agreed to follow, with sample sizes.
  3. Name the two most consequential findings and their business implication.
  4. State the decisions required and the resources they need.
  5. List what is not yet measurable and why.

Decision rules

  • IF a metric moved within the variance band → THEN report it as stable rather than as a change
  • IF a finding requires a decision outside SEO → THEN name the owner and the decision explicitly

Guardrails

  • Never present AI visibility figures as traffic or revenue projections
  • Never omit sample sizes from executive figures
  • Do not report a trend from a single period

Output

An executive brief: changes with evidence, three metrics, two findings, required decisions, and measurement limits.

Definition of done

  • Sample sizes included
  • Decisions named with owners
  • Limits stated
← Click to close
181

Search Console Decline Monitor

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
181

Search Console Decline Monitor

Purpose

Runs weekly to find pages losing meaningful clicks or impressions, separate sustained decline from normal volatility, and produce an ordered action queue.

Use when

Every week, on the same day, using the same comparison structure.

Not for

Investigating a single page in depth; this skill decides which pages deserve investigation.

Inputs

  • Search Console page and query export for the recent period
  • The equivalent export for the previous comparable period
  • Business value or revenue tier per page

Method

  1. Compare recent and previous periods of identical length for clicks, impressions, and average position.
  2. Apply the volatility threshold: flag only pages whose loss exceeds both the absolute and relative minimums.
  3. For each flagged page, identify the specific queries responsible for the loss.
  4. Classify the likely investigation path: intent shift, cannibalisation, technical, competitive, or seasonal.
  5. Order the queue by business impact, then by loss size, and state the next skill for each entry.

Decision rules

  • IF a loss falls within the volatility band or matches a known seasonal pattern → THEN exclude the page from the queue and record why
  • IF a page loses clicks while impressions and position hold → THEN classify it as result presentation or intent issue, not a ranking issue

Guardrails

  • Never invent Search Console figures; report only what the export contains
  • Never compare periods of different lengths or with unequal data delays
  • Never state a cause; state an investigation path with the evidence behind it

Output

An ordered action queue: page, business tier, click and impression change, responsible queries, investigation path, and next skill.

Definition of done

  • Periods matched in length and completeness
  • Volatility threshold applied and stated
  • Every queue entry has a next skill assigned
← Click to close
182

Query Loss Analyzer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
182

Query Loss Analyzer

Purpose

Determines which queries a page has lost and whether they disappeared, moved, or shifted to another URL.

Use when

After the decline monitor flags a page.

Not for

Site-wide performance reporting.

Inputs

  • Query-level export for the page across both periods
  • Site-wide query to URL mapping
  • Page content

Method

  1. List queries present in the previous period and absent or reduced in the recent one.
  2. Check whether each lost query now appears against a different URL on your site.
  3. Separate queries that lost position from queries that lost impressions entirely.
  4. Compare the lost queries' intent against the page's current content.
  5. Summarise the loss pattern in one sentence with the evidence.

Decision rules

  • IF lost queries now appear against another of your URLs → THEN route the page to the cannibalisation report
  • IF queries lost impressions without a position change → THEN investigate demand change or result presentation, not the page

Guardrails

  • Never assume a query disappeared because rankings fell
  • Never analyse query loss without checking other URLs on the same site
  • Do not report loss without stating the period lengths

Output

A loss analysis: lost queries, position and impression movement, receiving URLs, intent comparison, and a pattern summary.

Definition of done

  • Other URLs checked
  • Position and impression loss separated
  • Pattern stated with evidence
← Click to close
183

CTR Opportunity Finder

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
183

CTR Opportunity Finder

Purpose

Finds pages and queries where impressions are strong but clicks are disproportionately low.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Pages with too few impressions to be reliable.

Inputs

  • Query and page export with impressions, clicks, and position
  • Current titles and descriptions
  • Result feature observations where available

Method

  1. Filter to queries above the impression reliability threshold.
  2. Group by average position band, since expectations differ by position.
  3. Identify queries whose click-through is well below the band's typical level.
  4. Check whether result features or the current title explain the gap.
  5. Route each case to the title, description, or content skill with the specific evidence.

Decision rules

  • IF a low click-through is explained by a result feature answering the query → THEN record it and do not treat it as a title problem
  • IF impressions are below the reliability threshold → THEN exclude the row entirely

Guardrails

  • Never compare click-through across different position bands
  • Never promise click-through improvements from a rewrite
  • Do not act on queries below the impression threshold

Output

An opportunity list: query, page, position band, click-through, likely cause, and routed skill.

Definition of done

  • Threshold applied
  • Grouped by position band
  • Cause identified before routing
← Click to close
184

Impression Trend Reader

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
184

Impression Trend Reader

Purpose

Separates changes in visibility from changes in demand.

Use when

Monthly, and whenever clicks fall.

Not for

Diagnosing individual page issues.

Inputs

  • Impression data by query and page across several periods
  • Seasonality reference from the seasonality skill
  • Known site changes with dates

Method

  1. Plot impressions by cluster over the available periods.
  2. Distinguish clusters where impressions fell from those where position fell.
  3. Check falling clusters against known seasonal patterns.
  4. Identify clusters where impressions rose but clicks did not.
  5. Summarise which movements reflect demand and which reflect visibility.

Decision rules

  • IF impressions fall across an entire cluster including competitors' known terms → THEN treat it as demand change, not a site issue
  • IF impressions rise while clicks stay flat → THEN route it to the click-through analysis

Guardrails

  • Never interpret impression change without checking position
  • Never attribute demand changes to site performance
  • Do not report trends over fewer than three periods

Output

A trend summary by cluster: impression movement, position movement, seasonality check, and interpretation.

Definition of done

  • At least three periods used
  • Demand and visibility separated
  • Seasonality checked
← Click to close
185

Position Distribution Analyzer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
185

Position Distribution Analyzer

Purpose

Reports how the query portfolio is distributed across position bands and how the distribution is moving.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Reporting individual keyword positions.

Inputs

  • Query export with average position across two periods
  • Query to cluster mapping
  • Branded and non-branded split

Method

  1. Group queries into position bands and count them per band.
  2. Report the distribution separately for branded and non-branded queries.
  3. Compare band populations between periods and identify net movement.
  4. Identify clusters concentrated just outside the first page.
  5. Highlight the bands where movement would produce the most clicks.

Decision rules

  • IF branded and non-branded move in opposite directions → THEN report them separately and do not net them off
  • IF a cluster sits just outside the first page → THEN flag it as a priority for the opportunity backlog

Guardrails

  • Never report average position as a single site-wide number
  • Never blend branded and non-branded distributions
  • Do not present position movement as a click forecast

Output

A distribution report: band populations by segment, period movement, and priority clusters.

Definition of done

  • Branded split applied
  • Movement reported per band
  • Priority clusters identified
← Click to close
186

Branded vs Non-Branded Performance Split

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
186

Branded vs Non-Branded Performance Split

Purpose

Reports performance separately for brand demand and acquisition demand so growth is not misattributed.

Use when

In every performance report.

Not for

Query research.

Inputs

  • Performance export for both periods
  • Saved brand rule set
  • Campaign and PR activity dates

Method

  1. Apply the saved brand rules to split the export.
  2. Report clicks, impressions, and position for each segment separately.
  3. Compare each segment against its own prior period.
  4. Note brand campaigns or coverage that could explain branded movement.
  5. State clearly which segment drove any overall change.

Decision rules

  • IF total clicks rise while non-branded clicks fall → THEN report the divergence as the headline finding
  • IF brand terms grew during a campaign period → THEN attribute cautiously and name the campaign dates

Guardrails

  • Never report total performance without the split
  • Never claim SEO improvement from branded growth alone
  • Do not change brand rules between periods without noting it

Output

A split report: segment metrics, period comparison, explanatory activity, and the driver of overall change.

Definition of done

  • Rules applied consistently
  • Segments compared separately
  • Driver named
← Click to close
187

Cannibalization Report Builder

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
187

Cannibalization Report Builder

Purpose

Uses performance data to find queries where multiple URLs alternate or split impressions.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Pre-publication overlap checking; the planning skill covers that.

Inputs

  • Query and page export across several periods
  • Page to target query mapping
  • Page content summaries

Method

  1. Identify queries where more than one URL received impressions in the period.
  2. Flag queries where the receiving URL changed between periods.
  3. Compare each competing URL's intent and content against the query.
  4. Determine which URL should own the query.
  5. Route each case to consolidation, differentiation, or link refereeing.

Decision rules

  • IF the receiving URL alternates between periods → THEN treat it as active cannibalisation and prioritise it
  • IF two URLs receive impressions but serve different intents → THEN record it as coexistence, not cannibalisation

Guardrails

  • Never resolve cannibalisation by deleting a page
  • Never assume multiple URLs on one query is always harmful
  • Do not act on a single period's data

Output

A cannibalisation report: query, competing URLs, alternation pattern, intended owner, and routed resolution.

Definition of done

  • Multiple periods examined
  • Coexistence distinguished from cannibalisation
  • Resolutions routed
← Click to close
188

Landing Page Performance Reviewer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
188

Landing Page Performance Reviewer

Purpose

Reviews performance at the page level and connects it to the page's role in the site.

Use when

Monthly.

Not for

Query-level analysis.

Inputs

  • Page-level performance export for both periods
  • Page to cluster and stage mapping
  • Publication and update dates

Method

  1. Rank pages by clicks and by change in clicks for the period.
  2. Group them by cluster and by buyer stage.
  3. Identify pages performing far above or below others in the same group.
  4. Check whether outliers are explained by age, update recency, or internal links.
  5. Produce the list of pages to investigate and the reason for each.

Decision rules

  • IF a page underperforms others in its group → THEN compare its structure and links against the group's strongest page
  • IF a page outperforms its group → THEN document what it does differently and apply it to the group

Guardrails

  • Never compare pages across different clusters or stages
  • Never treat recent publications as underperforming before the maturity window
  • Do not report page performance without its group context

Output

A page review: rankings by group, outliers, explanatory factors, and an investigation list.

Definition of done

  • Grouping applied
  • Maturity window respected
  • Outliers explained or flagged
← Click to close
189

Country & Market Performance Analyzer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
189

Country & Market Performance Analyzer

Purpose

Breaks performance down by country so market-level changes are not hidden in totals.

Use when

Monthly for multi-market sites.

Not for

Single-market sites.

Inputs

  • Performance export segmented by country
  • Market priority and language mapping
  • Market-specific site sections

Method

  1. Report metrics by country for both periods, ordered by business priority.
  2. Identify markets moving against the overall trend.
  3. Check whether each market's traffic lands on its intended language section.
  4. Identify markets receiving impressions with no dedicated content.
  5. Summarise which markets need attention and why.

Decision rules

  • IF a market's traffic lands on the wrong language section → THEN route it to the hreflang and internationalisation skills
  • IF a market shows impressions with no dedicated content → THEN flag it as an expansion signal for the business

Guardrails

  • Never aggregate markets into a single figure without the breakdown
  • Never assume a market decline is site-related without checking the market's own trend
  • Do not compare markets with different content coverage as equals

Output

A market report: metrics by country, divergent markets, landing section correctness, and expansion signals.

Definition of done

  • Breakdown ordered by priority
  • Landing sections verified
  • Divergences identified
← Click to close
190

Device Performance Analyzer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
190

Device Performance Analyzer

Purpose

Compares performance by device to find experience gaps that aggregate reporting hides.

Use when

Quarterly, and after any front-end change.

Not for

Desktop-only or mobile-only properties.

Inputs

  • Performance export segmented by device
  • Template to page mapping
  • Mobile parity and performance findings

Method

  1. Report clicks, impressions, position, and click-through by device for both periods.
  2. Identify templates where device performance diverges materially.
  3. Cross-reference divergences with parity and page speed findings.
  4. Determine whether the gap is demand-driven or experience-driven.
  5. Route experience gaps to the relevant technical or on-page skill.

Decision rules

  • IF a template underperforms on mobile with equivalent position → THEN investigate the mobile experience, not rankings
  • IF device mix differs by query intent → THEN record it as expected demand behaviour

Guardrails

  • Never assume device differences indicate a defect without checking intent mix
  • Never compare device performance without segmenting by template
  • Do not report device gaps without click-through context

Output

A device report: metrics by device and template, divergences, cause classification, and routed actions.

Definition of done

  • Segmented by template
  • Cause classified
  • Actions routed
← Click to close
191

Content Performance Cohort Report

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
191

Content Performance Cohort Report

Purpose

Groups content by publication period to show whether recent work performs better than earlier work.

Use when

Quarterly.

Not for

Evaluating an individual page.

Inputs

  • Page inventory with publication dates
  • Performance data per page
  • Content type classification

Method

  1. Group pages into cohorts by publication quarter.
  2. Measure each cohort's performance at equivalent ages, not at the same calendar date.
  3. Compare cohorts by content type so formats are not mixed.
  4. Identify which cohorts and formats mature fastest.
  5. State what changed in process between cohorts where known.

Decision rules

  • IF a recent cohort has not reached the maturity window → THEN exclude it from comparison rather than reporting it as weak
  • IF cohorts differ mainly in content type mix → THEN report by type instead of by cohort

Guardrails

  • Never compare cohorts at different ages
  • Never mix content types within a cohort comparison
  • Do not attribute cohort differences to process changes without evidence

Output

A cohort report: cohorts by type, performance at matched ages, maturation patterns, and process notes.

Definition of done

  • Ages matched
  • Types separated
  • Immature cohorts excluded
← Click to close
192

Conversion Context Reporter

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
192

Conversion Context Reporter

Purpose

Connects search performance to downstream outcomes without overstating attribution.

Use when

Monthly, where conversion data is available.

Not for

Sites with no conversion tracking.

Inputs

  • Performance export by landing page
  • Conversion or downstream action data by landing page
  • Attribution model in use and its limits

Method

  1. Join performance and conversion data at the landing page level.
  2. Report volume and conversion together, never volume alone.
  3. Identify pages with high traffic and no downstream action.
  4. State the attribution model and what it cannot see.
  5. Route zero-conversion, high-traffic pages to the conversion support skill.

Decision rules

  • IF a page converts well with low traffic → THEN prioritise it in the opportunity backlog
  • IF attribution cannot connect a page to its outcome → THEN report the limitation rather than estimating

Guardrails

  • Never present assisted or modelled conversions as direct ones
  • Never report SEO conversions without naming the attribution model
  • Do not estimate revenue that the data does not contain

Output

A performance and conversion report by page, with attribution model, limits, and routed follow-ups.

Definition of done

  • Attribution model named
  • Limits stated
  • Follow-ups routed
← Click to close
193

SEO Dashboard Spec Builder

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
193

SEO Dashboard Spec Builder

Purpose

Specifies the dashboard: which metrics appear, at what granularity, and which decision each supports.

Use when

Once per reporting cycle design, then reviewed annually.

Not for

Building the dashboard itself in a specific tool.

Inputs

  • Stakeholder list and the decisions they make
  • Available data sources and their refresh cadence
  • Existing reports and their gaps

Method

  1. List the decisions the dashboard must support, by stakeholder.
  2. Select the minimum metrics that inform each decision.
  3. Define each metric's calculation, source, segment, and refresh cadence.
  4. Specify what is deliberately excluded and why.
  5. Define the review cadence for the specification itself.

Decision rules

  • IF a metric supports no listed decision → THEN exclude it from the dashboard
  • IF two stakeholders need the same metric at different granularities → THEN specify one calculation with two views

Guardrails

  • Never include metrics because they are available
  • Never leave a metric's calculation undefined
  • Do not build views that mix branded and non-branded data silently

Output

A dashboard specification: decisions, metrics with definitions and sources, views, exclusions, and review cadence.

Definition of done

  • Every metric tied to a decision
  • Calculations defined
  • Exclusions documented
← Click to close
194

Executive SEO Report Writer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
194

Executive SEO Report Writer

Purpose

Writes the periodic report for people who do not work in SEO.

Use when

Monthly or quarterly.

Not for

Technical team updates.

Inputs

  • Period performance data with segments
  • Completed work and its dates
  • Prior report for continuity

Method

  1. Open with what changed and what it means for the business, in two sentences.
  2. Report the agreed metrics with their comparison periods and segment splits.
  3. Explain the two most consequential movements and their evidence.
  4. State what was done, what is next, and what decisions are needed.
  5. List risks and what remains unmeasurable.

Decision rules

  • IF a movement has no confirmed cause → THEN state the leading hypothesis and the evidence required to confirm it
  • IF results are within normal variance → THEN say so rather than constructing a narrative

Guardrails

  • Never present correlation as causation
  • Never omit segment splits from headline figures
  • Do not fill a report with metrics that changed nothing

Output

An executive report: summary, agreed metrics with comparisons, two explained movements, actions, decisions, and risks.

Definition of done

  • Segments included
  • Causes stated as hypotheses where unconfirmed
  • Decisions named
← Click to close
195

Anomaly Detection Protocol

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
195

Anomaly Detection Protocol

Purpose

Defines what counts as an anomaly and what happens when one is detected.

Use when

Once, then applied continuously.

Not for

Routine performance reporting.

Inputs

  • Historical performance variance by segment
  • Known event dates: deployments, campaigns, and outages
  • Escalation contacts

Method

  1. Calculate normal variance per metric and segment from history.
  2. Set thresholds beyond which a movement is treated as an anomaly.
  3. Define the first-response checks: data completeness, tracking, indexing, and availability.
  4. Define escalation paths by anomaly type and severity.
  5. Define what is recorded for every anomaly, resolved or not.

Decision rules

  • IF a movement falls within historical variance → THEN log it and take no action
  • IF data completeness cannot be confirmed → THEN resolve the data question before investigating the site

Guardrails

  • Never investigate site causes before confirming the data is complete
  • Never set thresholds without historical variance
  • Do not close an anomaly without recording the conclusion

Output

A protocol document: thresholds by metric and segment, first-response checks, escalation paths, and the anomaly log format.

Definition of done

  • Thresholds derived from history
  • First-response order defined
  • Log format specified
← Click to close
196

SEO Experiment Tracker

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
196

SEO Experiment Tracker

Purpose

Structures changes as tested experiments with defined measurement rather than untracked edits.

Use when

Whenever a change is made to a group of pages.

Not for

One-off fixes to a single page.

Inputs

  • Proposed change and affected pages
  • Comparable control group
  • Historical variance for the metric

Method

  1. Define the hypothesis, the metric, and the expected direction before implementation.
  2. Select a control group of comparable pages that will not change.
  3. Set the measurement window based on historical variance and indexing time.
  4. Record the implementation date and confirm the change was applied.
  5. Report the result against the control, including inconclusive outcomes.

Decision rules

  • IF test and control move together → THEN record the result as inconclusive and attribute it to external factors
  • IF the change was applied inconsistently → THEN report on the consistently changed subset only

Guardrails

  • Never declare a result before the measurement window closes
  • Never run an experiment without a control group
  • Do not suppress inconclusive or negative results

Output

An experiment record: hypothesis, groups, dates, implementation verification, result against control, and conclusion.

Definition of done

  • Control group defined before implementation
  • Window set in advance
  • Result reported including negatives
← Click to close
197

Traffic Forecast Framer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
197

Traffic Forecast Framer

Purpose

Produces a scenario-based outlook rather than a single predicted number.

Use when

During planning and budgeting.

Not for

Committing to guaranteed traffic targets.

Inputs

  • At least 24 months of performance history
  • Planned work and its expected timing
  • Known seasonality and market changes

Method

  1. Establish the baseline from history, with seasonality separated.
  2. Build three scenarios: no further work, planned work delivered, and planned work delayed.
  3. State the assumptions behind each scenario explicitly.
  4. Express outcomes as ranges tied to those assumptions.
  5. Define the checkpoints at which the forecast will be revised.

Decision rules

  • IF history is shorter than two years → THEN present directional scenarios without ranges
  • IF an assumption is outside SEO's control → THEN name the owner of that assumption

Guardrails

  • Never present a single forecast number as a commitment
  • Never forecast without stating assumptions
  • Do not extrapolate a short-term trend across a full year

Output

A scenario outlook: baseline, three scenarios with assumptions and ranges, assumption owners, and revision checkpoints.

Definition of done

  • Assumptions stated per scenario
  • Ranges, not point predictions
  • Checkpoints defined
← Click to close
198

Opportunity Backlog Builder

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
198

Opportunity Backlog Builder

Purpose

Maintains the single backlog of identified opportunities so nothing found in analysis is lost.

Use when

Continuously, updated after each analysis cycle.

Not for

Prioritising within a single cycle; the scoring model does that.

Inputs

  • Outputs from all analysis skills
  • Existing backlog
  • Delivery status of previous items

Method

  1. Add new opportunities with their source skill, date, and evidence.
  2. Close items delivered and record their outcome.
  3. Re-verify items older than the agreed staleness window.
  4. Merge duplicates arising from different analyses.
  5. Report backlog size, age distribution, and delivery rate.

Decision rules

  • IF an item is older than the staleness window → THEN re-verify its evidence before it can be scheduled
  • IF two analyses produced the same opportunity → THEN merge them and keep both evidence sources

Guardrails

  • Never schedule an item whose evidence has not been verified within the window
  • Never delete unaddressed items without recording the reason
  • Do not let the backlog exist in more than one place

Output

A maintained backlog with source, evidence, date, status, and a summary of size, age, and delivery rate.

Definition of done

  • New opportunities sourced and dated
  • Stale items re-verified
  • Duplicates merged
← Click to close
199

Recommendation Prioritizer

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
199

Recommendation Prioritizer

Purpose

Turns a long list of recommendations into a short, sequenced set the team can actually deliver.

Use when

After any audit produces more recommendations than capacity allows.

Not for

Deciding whether a recommendation is valid.

Inputs

  • Full recommendation list with evidence
  • Team capacity and skill availability
  • Dependencies between recommendations

Method

  1. Group recommendations by the system they change: template, content, structure, or configuration.
  2. Identify dependencies and order them so blockers come first.
  3. Score each on expected effect, confidence, and effort.
  4. Cut to the capacity available and name what is deferred.
  5. Assign an owner and a verification method to each committed item.

Decision rules

  • IF a recommendation depends on another → THEN schedule the dependency first regardless of its own score
  • IF a recommendation has high effect and low confidence → THEN schedule a smaller validation first

Guardrails

  • Never present a recommendation list without capacity applied
  • Never commit items without an owner
  • Do not drop deferred items silently; move them to the backlog

Output

A committed plan: sequenced items with owners and verification, plus an explicit deferred list.

Definition of done

  • Dependencies ordered
  • Capacity line applied
  • Deferred items moved to the backlog
← Click to close
200

Monthly SEO Review Facilitator

Reporting & Analysis Click to open →
200

Monthly SEO Review Facilitator

Purpose

Structures the recurring review meeting so it produces decisions rather than a data walkthrough.

Use when

Monthly, before the review meeting.

Not for

Ad hoc problem-solving sessions.

Inputs

  • Period reports and scorecards
  • Backlog and delivery status
  • Open decisions from the previous review

Method

  1. Open with the decisions carried over and their status.
  2. Present the three findings that could change the plan, with evidence.
  3. State what was delivered and what its measurement shows so far.
  4. Bring the decisions required this month, each with options and a recommendation.
  5. Close by recording decisions, owners, and dates.

Decision rules

  • IF a finding does not change any decision → THEN move it to the appendix rather than the agenda
  • IF a decision was carried over twice → THEN escalate it or close it with a documented default

Guardrails

  • Never fill the agenda with metrics that change no decision
  • Never close a review without recorded decisions and owners
  • Do not present unmeasured work as delivered results

Output

A review pack and decision record: carried-over items, three findings, delivery status, decisions with owners and dates.

Definition of done

  • Every agenda item tied to a decision
  • Decisions recorded with owners
  • Carried-over items resolved or escalated
← Click to close
201

ICP Research

Research & Intelligence E-com / CMO Click to open →
201

ICP Research

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Continuously refine the ICP profile from real customer behavior, not marketing personas.

Use when

Monthly on the 1st, 9:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Shopify customer data (last 90 days orders + LTV segments)
  • Klaviyo engagement data
  • Review sources (Judge.me, support tickets)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Shopify customer data (last 90 days orders + LTV segments); Klaviyo engagement data; Review sources (Judge.me, support tickets).
  2. Continuously refine the ICP profile from real customer behavior, not marketing personas.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Updated icp_core.md with demographic, psychographic, spending-behavior and objection patterns.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Positioning (2.2) and Concept Ideas (3.1) and all downstream Claude prompts via the SessionStart hook.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Updated icp_core.md with demographic, psychographic, spending-behavior and objection patterns.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Positioning (2.2) and Concept Ideas (3.1) and all downstream Claude prompts via the SessionStart hook.
← Click to close
202

Review Miner

Research & Intelligence E-com / CMO Click to open →
202

Review Miner

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Extract real customer language from reviews, DMs and support tickets on a weekly cadence.

Use when

Weekly, Monday 7:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Shopify + Judge.me reviews
  • Klaviyo replies and Meta comments
  • Support ticket exports

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Shopify + Judge.me reviews; Klaviyo replies and Meta comments; Support ticket exports.
  2. Extract real customer language from reviews, DMs and support tickets on a weekly cadence.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Top 30 customer phrases, top 10 objections, and top 10 aspirations.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Hook Writer (3.2) copy, Landing Page Capture (5.1) copy, and Welcome Flow (6.1) sequences.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Top 30 customer phrases, top 10 objections, and top 10 aspirations.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Hook Writer (3.2) copy, Landing Page Capture (5.1) copy, and Welcome Flow (6.1) sequences.
← Click to close
203

Competitor Ad Radar

Research & Intelligence E-com / CMO Click to open →
203

Competitor Ad Radar

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Scan 5 to 10 tracked competitors on Meta Ad Library, TikTok and Google on a weekly cadence.

Use when

Weekly, Sunday 10:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Competitors.md (competitor list + ad library URLs)
  • Perplexity MCP research access

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Competitors.md (competitor list + ad library URLs); Perplexity MCP research access.
  2. Scan 5 to 10 tracked competitors on Meta Ad Library, TikTok and Google on a weekly cadence.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A gap analysis of formats, hooks, angles and offers competitors run that the brand does not, plus 5 exploitation concepts.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Concept Ideas (3.1) and Sprint Planner (2.3).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A gap analysis of formats, hooks, angles and offers competitors run that the brand does not, plus 5 exploitation concepts.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Concept Ideas (3.1) and Sprint Planner (2.3).
← Click to close
204

Trend Monitor

Research & Intelligence E-com / CMO Click to open →
204

Trend Monitor

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Track emerging trends in the category across TikTok, Instagram, Reddit and YouTube on a weekly cadence.

Use when

Weekly, Sunday 6:00 PM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Perplexity MCP
  • TikTok and Reddit scrape data
  • Category keyword list

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Perplexity MCP; TikTok and Reddit scrape data; Category keyword list.
  2. Track emerging trends in the category across TikTok, Instagram, Reddit and YouTube on a weekly cadence.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Top 10 trending formats and hook mechanisms with a novelty score.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Concept Ideas (3.1) and Offer Design (2.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Top 10 trending formats and hook mechanisms with a novelty score.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Concept Ideas (3.1) and Offer Design (2.2).
← Click to close
205

Customer Interview Synthesizer

Research & Intelligence E-com / CMO Click to open →
205

Customer Interview Synthesizer

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Turn raw sales calls, support transcripts and customer interviews into structured buyer insight the prompt alone cannot fake.

Use when

On new transcript upload (calls, surveys, post-purchase interviews)

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Call and interview transcripts
  • Survey exports
  • Klaviyo post-purchase question flows

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Call and interview transcripts; Survey exports; Klaviyo post-purchase question flows.
  2. Turn raw sales calls, support transcripts and customer interviews into structured buyer insight the prompt alone cannot fake.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Buying triggers, decision timelines, and the exact words used to describe the before and after state.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds ICP Research (1.1), Positioning (2.1) and Concept Ideas (3.1).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Buying triggers, decision timelines, and the exact words used to describe the before and after state.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds ICP Research (1.1), Positioning (2.1) and Concept Ideas (3.1).
← Click to close
206

Market Gap Finder

Research & Intelligence E-com / CMO Click to open →
206

Market Gap Finder

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Find where the category is under-served, mispriced or poorly positioned, not just what competitors are running.

Use when

Monthly, tied to the Positioning (2.1) cycle

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Competitor Ad Radar output (1.3)
  • Category pricing scrape
  • Perplexity market research
  • Review-mined objections (1.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Competitor Ad Radar output (1.3); Category pricing scrape; Perplexity market research; Review-mined objections (1.2).
  2. Find where the category is under-served, mispriced or poorly positioned, not just what competitors are running.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A ranked list of market gaps (price tier, format, use-case, audience segment) with an opportunity score.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Positioning (2.1), Offer Design (2.2) and Pricing & Bundling Strategist (2.5).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A ranked list of market gaps (price tier, format, use-case, audience segment) with an opportunity score.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Positioning (2.1), Offer Design (2.2) and Pricing & Bundling Strategist (2.5).
← Click to close
207

Positioning

Strategy & Planning E-com / CMO Click to open →
207

Positioning

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Refine brand positioning quarterly based on ICP shifts and competitor movement.

Use when

Quarterly, on the 1st of the quarter

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • ICP Research output (1.1)
  • Competitor Ad Radar output (1.3)
  • Market Gap Finder output (1.6)
  • product_core.md

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: ICP Research output (1.1); Competitor Ad Radar output (1.3); Market Gap Finder output (1.6); product_core.md.
  2. Refine brand positioning quarterly based on ICP shifts and competitor movement.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A positioning statement, differentiation angles, and ICP tension prioritization.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Offer Design (2.2), Sprint Planner (2.3) and all creative skills.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A positioning statement, differentiation angles, and ICP tension prioritization.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Offer Design (2.2), Sprint Planner (2.3) and all creative skills.
← Click to close
208

Offer Design

Strategy & Planning E-com / CMO Click to open →
208

Offer Design

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Frame current offers through urgency, value and risk-reversal mechanics: what makes the product easier to buy, not just cheaper.

Use when

On new offer rollout or a campaign-objective shift

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Positioning output (2.1)
  • Klaviyo historical offer performance
  • Trend Monitor output (1.4)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Positioning output (2.1); Klaviyo historical offer performance; Trend Monitor output (1.4).
  2. Frame current offers through urgency, value and risk-reversal mechanics: what makes the product easier to buy, not just cheaper.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Primary and secondary offer positioning per campaign.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Creative Brief (3.6), Email + SMS (4.4) copy and Offer Page Builder (5.6).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Primary and secondary offer positioning per campaign.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Creative Brief (3.6), Email + SMS (4.4) copy and Offer Page Builder (5.6).
← Click to close
209

Sprint Planner

Strategy & Planning E-com / CMO Click to open →
209

Sprint Planner

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run the weekly Monday sprint plan: SKU priorities, concept quotas and budget allocation.

Use when

Weekly, Monday 8:00 AM, before sprint kickoff

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • All Research function outputs
  • Positioning output (2.1)
  • Last week's Weekly Report (7.4)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: All Research function outputs; Positioning output (2.1); Last week's Weekly Report (7.4).
  2. Run the weekly Monday sprint plan: SKU priorities, concept quotas and budget allocation.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A sprint brief: this week's hero SKUs, concept quotas, budget targets and iteration priorities.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Concept Ideas (3.1), Meta Ads (4.1) and TikTok Ads (4.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A sprint brief: this week's hero SKUs, concept quotas, budget targets and iteration priorities.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Concept Ideas (3.1), Meta Ads (4.1) and TikTok Ads (4.2).
← Click to close
210

Budget Allocation

Strategy & Planning E-com / CMO Click to open →
210

Budget Allocation

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Allocate weekly budget across campaigns, channels and iterations.

Use when

Weekly, Monday 8:30 AM, after Sprint Planner

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Sprint brief (2.3)
  • matrix_core.md thresholds
  • Last week's spend efficiency

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Sprint brief (2.3); matrix_core.md thresholds; Last week's spend efficiency.
  2. Allocate weekly budget across campaigns, channels and iterations.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A budget allocation table per campaign plus a reserved iteration budget.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Meta Ads (4.1), TikTok Ads (4.2) and Email + SMS (4.4).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A budget allocation table per campaign plus a reserved iteration budget.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Meta Ads (4.1), TikTok Ads (4.2) and Email + SMS (4.4).
← Click to close
211

Pricing & Bundling Strategist

Strategy & Planning E-com / CMO Click to open →
211

Pricing & Bundling Strategist

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Design offer strategy at the product-architecture level: bundles, subscribe-and-save, tiered value packs, so the cart sells harder, not just the ad.

Use when

On new SKU launch or a monthly margin review

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Market Gap Finder output (1.6)
  • Shopify order and margin data
  • Offer Design output (2.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Market Gap Finder output (1.6); Shopify order and margin data; Offer Design output (2.2).
  2. Design offer strategy at the product-architecture level: bundles, subscribe-and-save, tiered value packs, so the cart sells harder, not just the ad.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Bundle and pricing-tier recommendations with a projected AOV lift.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Offer Design (2.2), Landing Page Capture (5.1) and Offer Page Builder (5.6).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Bundle and pricing-tier recommendations with a projected AOV lift.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Offer Design (2.2), Landing Page Capture (5.1) and Offer Page Builder (5.6).
← Click to close
212

Channel Mix Planner

Strategy & Planning E-com / CMO Click to open →
212

Channel Mix Planner

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Decide where this week's budget and creative volume goes across Meta, TikTok, Google/YouTube, Email and Organic before Budget Allocation locks numbers.

Use when

Weekly, Monday 8:00 AM, ahead of Budget Allocation

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Attribution channel-contribution data (7.2)
  • Sprint brief (2.3)
  • Trend Monitor output (1.4)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Attribution channel-contribution data (7.2); Sprint brief (2.3); Trend Monitor output (1.4).
  2. Decide where this week's budget and creative volume goes across Meta, TikTok, Google/YouTube, Email and Organic before Budget Allocation locks numbers.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A recommended channel weighting for the week.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Budget Allocation (2.4) and the whole Campaigns & Distribution function.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A recommended channel weighting for the week.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Budget Allocation (2.4) and the whole Campaigns & Distribution function.
← Click to close
213

Concept Ideas

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
213

Concept Ideas

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Generate 20 ad-angle concepts per hero SKU per sprint.

Use when

Weekly, Monday 9:00 AM, after Sprint Planner approval

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Sprint brief (2.3)
  • Trend Monitor output (1.4)
  • Competitor gaps (1.3)
  • ICP language (1.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Sprint brief (2.3); Trend Monitor output (1.4); Competitor gaps (1.3); ICP language (1.2).
  2. Generate 20 ad-angle concepts per hero SKU per sprint.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: 80 to 100 concepts per week, ranked by ICP fit and novelty.
  5. Log the handoff: The top 20 approved concepts route to Hook Writer (3.2).

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

80 to 100 concepts per week, ranked by ICP fit and novelty.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: The top 20 approved concepts route to Hook Writer (3.2).
← Click to close
214

Hook Writer

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
214

Hook Writer

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Write 10 hooks per approved concept using 10 distinct pattern-break mechanisms.

Use when

After Concept Ideas approval

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Top 20 approved concepts
  • ICP language (1.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Top 20 approved concepts; ICP language (1.2).
  2. Write 10 hooks per approved concept using 10 distinct pattern-break mechanisms.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: 200 hooks (20 concepts x 10 mechanisms), scored and ranked.
  5. Log the handoff: The winning hook per concept routes to Ad Copywriter (3.3).

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

200 hooks (20 concepts x 10 mechanisms), scored and ranked.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: The winning hook per concept routes to Ad Copywriter (3.3).
← Click to close
215

Ad Copywriter

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
215

Ad Copywriter

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Turn the winning hook into full ad copy: primary text, captions and CTA variants, so the angle survives past the first three seconds.

Use when

After Hook Writer selects a winner

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Winning hook (3.2)
  • Offer Design output (2.2)
  • ICP language (1.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Winning hook (3.2); Offer Design output (2.2); ICP language (1.2).
  2. Turn the winning hook into full ad copy: primary text, captions and CTA variants, so the angle survives past the first three seconds.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Primary text, caption and 3 CTA variants per winning hook.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Storyboard Builder (3.5) and Creative Brief (3.6).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Primary text, caption and 3 CTA variants per winning hook.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Storyboard Builder (3.5) and Creative Brief (3.6).
← Click to close
216

Creative Strategy Director

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
216

Creative Strategy Director

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Decide what actually gets produced and why: format mix, production-complexity budget, and which angles earn a full shoot versus a quick UGC cut.

Use when

Weekly, after Concept Ideas ranks the sprint's angles

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Ranked concepts (3.1)
  • Production capacity
  • Past Kill/Scale results (7.1)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Ranked concepts (3.1); Production capacity; Past Kill/Scale results (7.1).
  2. Decide what actually gets produced and why: format mix, production-complexity budget, and which angles earn a full shoot versus a quick UGC cut.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A weekly production plan: which concepts get which format, and the reasoning per pick.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Storyboard Builder (3.5) and Creative Brief (3.6).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A weekly production plan: which concepts get which format, and the reasoning per pick.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Storyboard Builder (3.5) and Creative Brief (3.6).
← Click to close
217

Storyboard Builder

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
217

Storyboard Builder

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Build a 6-shot storyboard per winning hook and concept.

Use when

After Ad Copywriter delivers copy

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Winning hook, copy and concept
  • Product and format specification

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Winning hook, copy and concept; Product and format specification.
  2. Build a 6-shot storyboard per winning hook and concept.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: 20 storyboards with pacing QA and a READY verdict.
  5. Log the handoff: Approved storyboards route to Creative Brief (3.6).

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

20 storyboards with pacing QA and a READY verdict.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Approved storyboards route to Creative Brief (3.6).
← Click to close
218

Creative Brief

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
218

Creative Brief

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Package the approved storyboard, character, product and assembly spec into a complete production brief.

Use when

After Storyboard Builder marks READY

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Approved storyboard
  • Character and product locks
  • Assembly spec
  • Offer Design output (2.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Approved storyboard; Character and product locks; Assembly spec; Offer Design output (2.2).
  2. Package the approved storyboard, character, product and assembly spec into a complete production brief.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: 20 complete production briefs ready for downstream execution.
  5. Log the handoff: Routes to the Meta Ads (4.1) production pipeline.

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

20 complete production briefs ready for downstream execution.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Routes to the Meta Ads (4.1) production pipeline.
← Click to close
219

UGC Script & Talent Matcher

Content & Creative E-com / CMO Click to open →
219

UGC Script & Talent Matcher

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Match each approved concept to the right AI or human talent profile and write the delivery script, so tone stays ICP-native across every creator.

Use when

After Creative Brief is finalized

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Creative Brief (3.6)
  • ICP language (1.2)
  • Talent and character library

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Creative Brief (3.6); ICP language (1.2); Talent and character library.
  2. Match each approved concept to the right AI or human talent profile and write the delivery script, so tone stays ICP-native across every creator.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A talent-matched delivery script per concept.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds the production pipeline into Meta Ads (4.1) and TikTok Ads (4.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A talent-matched delivery script per concept.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds the production pipeline into Meta Ads (4.1) and TikTok Ads (4.2).
← Click to close
220

Meta Ads

Campaigns & Distribution E-com / CMO Click to open →
220

Meta Ads

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Ship 15 to 20 ads per week to Meta Ads Manager with correct campaign structure.

Use when

Thursday 4:00 PM, after the production pipeline delivers finished ads

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Creative Briefs (3.6)
  • Budget Allocation (2.4)
  • Finished ad files

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Creative Briefs (3.6); Budget Allocation (2.4); Finished ad files.
  2. Ship 15 to 20 ads per week to Meta Ads Manager with correct campaign structure.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Draft ads uploaded to Meta Ads Manager with UTM and naming enforcement.
  5. Log the handoff: Operator approves drafts, live Friday 9:00 AM, feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Draft ads uploaded to Meta Ads Manager with UTM and naming enforcement.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Operator approves drafts, live Friday 9:00 AM, feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1).
← Click to close
221

TikTok Ads

Campaigns & Distribution E-com / CMO Click to open →
221

TikTok Ads

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Ship 8 to 10 ads per week to TikTok Ads Manager, same content as Meta with platform-specific captions.

Use when

Thursday 4:00 PM, parallel to Meta Ads

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Same Creative Briefs (3.6) as Meta
  • TikTok-specific captions from Ad Copywriter (3.3)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Same Creative Briefs (3.6) as Meta; TikTok-specific captions from Ad Copywriter (3.3).
  2. Ship 8 to 10 ads per week to TikTok Ads Manager, same content as Meta with platform-specific captions.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Draft ads in TikTok Ads Manager.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Draft ads in TikTok Ads Manager.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1).
← Click to close
222

Google & YouTube Ads

Campaigns & Distribution E-com / CMO Click to open →
222

Google & YouTube Ads

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Turn the same creative library and offer into Search, Shopping, PMax and YouTube in-stream campaigns, capturing demand the social channels create.

Use when

Thursday 4:00 PM, parallel to Meta and TikTok

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Creative Brief (3.6)
  • Offer Design output (2.2)
  • Budget Allocation (2.4)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Creative Brief (3.6); Offer Design output (2.2); Budget Allocation (2.4).
  2. Turn the same creative library and offer into Search, Shopping, PMax and YouTube in-stream campaigns, capturing demand the social channels create.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Draft Search, Shopping, PMax and YouTube campaigns with UTM enforcement.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1) and Attribution (7.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Draft Search, Shopping, PMax and YouTube campaigns with UTM enforcement.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1) and Attribution (7.2).
← Click to close
223

Email + SMS

Campaigns & Distribution E-com / CMO Click to open →
223

Email + SMS

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Coordinate Klaviyo campaigns tied to the weekly sprint theme (launches, offers, winner amplification).

Use when

Weekly, Monday 10:00 AM, after Sprint Planner

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Sprint brief (2.3)
  • Offer Design output (2.2)
  • ICP language (1.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Sprint brief (2.3); Offer Design output (2.2); ICP language (1.2).
  2. Coordinate Klaviyo campaigns tied to the weekly sprint theme (launches, offers, winner amplification).
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: 2 to 3 Klaviyo campaigns scheduled for the week.
  5. Log the handoff: Performance feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1) and Attribution (7.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

2 to 3 Klaviyo campaigns scheduled for the week.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Performance feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1) and Attribution (7.2).
← Click to close
224

Organic Social

Campaigns & Distribution E-com / CMO Click to open →
224

Organic Social

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Repurpose paid-winner concepts into organic posts across Instagram, TikTok and LinkedIn.

Use when

When any paid ad hits the scale threshold in Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1)

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Winning ad file, concept and copy from Creative Brief (3.6)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Winning ad file, concept and copy from Creative Brief (3.6).
  2. Repurpose paid-winner concepts into organic posts across Instagram, TikTok and LinkedIn.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Scheduled organic posts across accounts.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Attribution (7.2) tracking.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Scheduled organic posts across accounts.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Attribution (7.2) tracking.
← Click to close
225

Retargeting Builder

Campaigns & Distribution E-com / CMO Click to open →
225

Retargeting Builder

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Rebuild and refresh the retargeting stack weekly: site visitors, add-to-cart, video viewers, past purchasers, so no warm lead is left un-marketed-to.

Use when

Weekly, Wednesday 9:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Meta/TikTok/Google pixel audiences
  • Intent Scoring segments (5.4)
  • Kill/Scale winners (7.1)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Meta/TikTok/Google pixel audiences; Intent Scoring segments (5.4); Kill/Scale winners (7.1).
  2. Rebuild and refresh the retargeting stack weekly: site visitors, add-to-cart, video viewers, past purchasers, so no warm lead is left un-marketed-to.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Refreshed retargeting audiences and matched ad sets per funnel stage.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Meta Ads (4.1), TikTok Ads (4.2) and Google & YouTube Ads (4.3).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Refreshed retargeting audiences and matched ad sets per funnel stage.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Meta Ads (4.1), TikTok Ads (4.2) and Google & YouTube Ads (4.3).
← Click to close
226

Landing Page Capture

Lead Gen & Conversion E-com / CMO Click to open →
226

Landing Page Capture

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Ensure every campaign has a matching landing page with a capture form and ICP-native copy.

Use when

On new campaign launch from Meta, TikTok or Google & YouTube Ads

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Concept and hook
  • ICP language (1.2)
  • Offer Design output (2.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Concept and hook; ICP language (1.2); Offer Design output (2.2).
  2. Ensure every campaign has a matching landing page with a capture form and ICP-native copy.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A landing-page brief, or an auto-generated page when using an Unbounce or Webflow API.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Enrichment (5.3).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A landing-page brief, or an auto-generated page when using an Unbounce or Webflow API.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Enrichment (5.3).
← Click to close
227

Conversion Leak Auditor

Lead Gen & Conversion E-com / CMO Click to open →
227

Conversion Leak Auditor

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Find exactly where visitors drop off between ad click and purchase, and fix it rather than only flag it.

Use when

Weekly, Wednesday 10:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Landing Page Capture pages (5.1)
  • Shopify Analytics
  • Heat-map data (Hotjar / Microsoft Clarity)
  • Session recordings

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Landing Page Capture pages (5.1); Shopify Analytics; Heat-map data (Hotjar / Microsoft Clarity); Session recordings.
  2. Find exactly where visitors drop off between ad click and purchase, and fix it rather than only flag it.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A ranked list of conversion leaks by revenue impact, each with a specific fix.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds the CRO test queue (5.5) and Landing Page Capture updates (5.1).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A ranked list of conversion leaks by revenue impact, each with a specific fix.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds the CRO test queue (5.5) and Landing Page Capture updates (5.1).
← Click to close
228

Enrichment

Lead Gen & Conversion E-com / CMO Click to open →
228

Enrichment

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Enrich captured leads with third-party data for personalization.

Use when

On lead capture

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Lead capture data (email, IP, form fields)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Lead capture data (email, IP, form fields).
  2. Enrich captured leads with third-party data for personalization.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: An enriched lead record (company, role, firmographics where applicable).
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Intent Scoring (5.4) and Welcome Flow (6.1).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

An enriched lead record (company, role, firmographics where applicable).

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Intent Scoring (5.4) and Welcome Flow (6.1).
← Click to close
229

Intent Scoring

Lead Gen & Conversion E-com / CMO Click to open →
229

Intent Scoring

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Score every lead 1 to 10 for purchase intent based on behavior: pages visited, cart abandonment, discount-code use, time on site.

Use when

On enrichment and every 24 hours thereafter

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Enriched lead
  • Shopify behavior data
  • Klaviyo engagement

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Enriched lead; Shopify behavior data; Klaviyo engagement.
  2. Score every lead 1 to 10 for purchase intent based on behavior: pages visited, cart abandonment, discount-code use, time on site.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: An intent score and segment assignment.
  5. Log the handoff: HIGH INTENT routes to the accelerated Welcome Flow (6.1) track and Retargeting Builder (4.6) priority audience; LOW INTENT to the standard Welcome Flow.

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

An intent score and segment assignment.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: HIGH INTENT routes to the accelerated Welcome Flow (6.1) track and Retargeting Builder (4.6) priority audience; LOW INTENT to the standard Welcome Flow.
← Click to close
230

CRO

Lead Gen & Conversion E-com / CMO Click to open →
230

CRO

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run weekly conversion-rate optimization on landing pages, PDPs and checkout.

Use when

Weekly, Wednesday 10:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Conversion Leak Auditor findings (5.2)
  • Shopify Analytics
  • Meta Attribution

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Conversion Leak Auditor findings (5.2); Shopify Analytics; Meta Attribution.
  2. Run weekly conversion-rate optimization on landing pages, PDPs and checkout.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: 3 to 5 A/B test recommendations for landing pages, PDP and checkout.
  5. Log the handoff: Test recommendations route to the A/B Testing queue (7.3).

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

3 to 5 A/B test recommendations for landing pages, PDP and checkout.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Test recommendations route to the A/B Testing queue (7.3).
← Click to close
231

Offer Page Builder

Lead Gen & Conversion E-com / CMO Click to open →
231

Offer Page Builder

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Build the advertorial or long-form offer pages that carry a cold or skeptical visitor across the line: the layer between the ad and the product page.

Use when

On a new offer or an angle proven at the scale threshold

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Offer Design output (2.2)
  • Pricing & Bundling Strategist output (2.5)
  • Winning ad copy (3.3)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Offer Design output (2.2); Pricing & Bundling Strategist output (2.5); Winning ad copy (3.3).
  2. Build the advertorial or long-form offer pages that carry a cold or skeptical visitor across the line: the layer between the ad and the product page.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: An advertorial or offer-page draft with a proof stack and objection handling.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Landing Page Capture (5.1) and Retargeting Builder (4.6).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

An advertorial or offer-page draft with a proof stack and objection handling.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Landing Page Capture (5.1) and Retargeting Builder (4.6).
← Click to close
232

Welcome Flow

CRM & Lifecycle E-com / CMO Click to open →
232

Welcome Flow

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run the automated welcome sequence for new subscribers with ICP-native copy.

Use when

On new subscriber capture

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Enriched lead
  • Intent score
  • ICP language (1.2)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Enriched lead; Intent score; ICP language (1.2).
  2. Run the automated welcome sequence for new subscribers with ICP-native copy.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A 5-email welcome sequence over 14 days.
  5. Log the handoff: On first purchase, hands off to Onboarding (6.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A 5-email welcome sequence over 14 days.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: On first purchase, hands off to Onboarding (6.2).
← Click to close
233

Onboarding

CRM & Lifecycle E-com / CMO Click to open →
233

Onboarding

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run the post-purchase onboarding sequence to maximize first-order satisfaction and set up the second order.

Use when

On first purchase

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Order data
  • SKU purchased
  • Shopify customer profile

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Order data; SKU purchased; Shopify customer profile.
  2. Run the post-purchase onboarding sequence to maximize first-order satisfaction and set up the second order.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A 3-email onboarding sequence over 21 days: product education, review request, upsell tee-up.
  5. Log the handoff: On second-purchase failure at day 45, routes to Win-Back (6.3).

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A 3-email onboarding sequence over 21 days: product education, review request, upsell tee-up.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: On second-purchase failure at day 45, routes to Win-Back (6.3).
← Click to close
234

Win-Back

CRM & Lifecycle E-com / CMO Click to open →
234

Win-Back

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run automated re-engagement for lapsed customers, 45+ days with no purchase: the CRM-side counterpart to Retargeting Builder (4.6) on paid.

Use when

Day 45 post-last-purchase

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Customer purchase history
  • Klaviyo engagement

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Customer purchase history; Klaviyo engagement.
  2. Run automated re-engagement for lapsed customers, 45+ days with no purchase: the CRM-side counterpart to Retargeting Builder (4.6) on paid.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A 4-touch win-back sequence over 30 days with escalating offers.
  5. Log the handoff: On re-purchase, routes back to Onboarding (6.2); on no response after day 75, flags for the suppression list.

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A 4-touch win-back sequence over 30 days with escalating offers.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: On re-purchase, routes back to Onboarding (6.2); on no response after day 75, flags for the suppression list.
← Click to close
235

Upsell

CRM & Lifecycle E-com / CMO Click to open →
235

Upsell

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Generate behavior-based upsell and cross-sell offers from prior purchase patterns.

Use when

On an order-pattern match (customer bought SKU A, recommend SKU B)

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Order history
  • Product affinity data
  • Margin data

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Order history; Product affinity data; Margin data.
  2. Generate behavior-based upsell and cross-sell offers from prior purchase patterns.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A personalized upsell email and SMS with a dynamic product recommendation.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Attribution (7.2).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never export or share the underlying workflow externally; it contains API keys and brand configuration.
  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A personalized upsell email and SMS with a dynamic product recommendation.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Attribution (7.2).
← Click to close
236

Kill/Scale Matrix

Analytics & Optimisation E-com / CMO Click to open →
236

Kill/Scale Matrix

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run the daily matrix on all live ads.

Use when

Daily, 9:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Meta, TikTok and Google Ads MCP data
  • matrix_core.md thresholds

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Meta, TikTok and Google Ads MCP data; matrix_core.md thresholds.
  2. Run the daily matrix on all live ads.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: KILL, SCALE, HOLD or ITERATE decisions with strategic scale sizing.
  5. Log the handoff: SCALE approvals route to Meta, TikTok and Google & YouTube Ads; ITERATE routes to Concept Ideas (3.1); KILL routes to the post-mortem library.

Decision rules

  • IF the output meets the approval-gate criteria for this transition → THEN route it automatically; otherwise hold for operator sign-off
  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never keep a marketing agency retainer for work this skill already handles reliably.
  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

KILL, SCALE, HOLD or ITERATE decisions with strategic scale sizing.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: SCALE approvals route to Meta, TikTok and Google & YouTube Ads; ITERATE routes to Concept Ideas (3.1); KILL routes to the post-mortem library.
← Click to close
237

Attribution

Analytics & Optimisation E-com / CMO Click to open →
237

Attribution

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Run cross-channel attribution modeling (Meta, TikTok, Google, Email, Organic) with contribution weighting.

Use when

Daily, 8:00 AM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Meta, TikTok, Google, Klaviyo and Shopify data
  • UTM tracking

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Meta, TikTok, Google, Klaviyo and Shopify data; UTM tracking.
  2. Run cross-channel attribution modeling (Meta, TikTok, Google, Email, Organic) with contribution weighting.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: An attribution report showing which channels contributed to conversions and the revenue split.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds the Weekly Report (7.4) and informs Budget Allocation (2.4) and Channel Mix Planner (2.6) the following Monday.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never build all 7 functions in week one; build in dependency order (Research → Strategy → Content → Distribution → Lead Gen → CRM → Analytics).
  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

An attribution report showing which channels contributed to conversions and the revenue split.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds the Weekly Report (7.4) and informs Budget Allocation (2.4) and Channel Mix Planner (2.6) the following Monday.
← Click to close
238

A/B Testing

Analytics & Optimisation E-com / CMO Click to open →
238

A/B Testing

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Manage the A/B test queue across ads, landing pages, email subject lines and checkout.

Use when

Continuous: new tests launch as prior tests conclude

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Test recommendations from CRO (5.5)
  • Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1)
  • Sprint Planner (2.3)

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Test recommendations from CRO (5.5); Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1); Sprint Planner (2.3).
  2. Manage the A/B test queue across ads, landing pages, email subject lines and checkout.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: Test results per experiment with winner selection and statistical significance.
  5. Log the handoff: Winners feed the Concept Ideas (3.1) library and Landing Page Capture (5.1) updates.

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never let this skill hand off directly to a downstream skill without routing through the Marketing Orchestrator once the department is live.
  • Never run this skill without at least 4 weeks of historical performance data behind it; the feedback loop needs a baseline.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

Test results per experiment with winner selection and statistical significance.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Winners feed the Concept Ideas (3.1) library and Landing Page Capture (5.1) updates.
← Click to close
239

Weekly Report

Analytics & Optimisation E-com / CMO Click to open →
239

Weekly Report

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Generate the auto-generated Friday founder-facing executive report.

Use when

Friday, 3:00 PM

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • All 7 function outputs from the last 7 days

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: All 7 function outputs from the last 7 days.
  2. Generate the auto-generated Friday founder-facing executive report.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A PDF report (5 pages max) emailed to the founder plus a Slack summary.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds next Monday's Sprint Planner (2.3) and Research skills (1.1 to 1.6).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never auto-execute a scale decision or a draft-to-live transition without the operator approval gate.
  • Never skip the weekly operator review; the engine handles execution, the operator handles judgment.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A PDF report (5 pages max) emailed to the founder plus a Slack summary.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds next Monday's Sprint Planner (2.3) and Research skills (1.1 to 1.6).
← Click to close
240

Creative Fatigue & LTV/CAC Monitor

Analytics & Optimisation E-com / CMO Click to open →
240

Creative Fatigue & LTV/CAC Monitor

Source: E-com / CMO

Purpose

Track the two numbers most brands catch too late: how fast each creative is decaying, and whether CAC is drifting past LTV on any segment.

Use when

Daily, 9:00 AM, alongside Kill/Scale Matrix

Not for

Work owned by the adjacent skill in the chain (see handoff below) — this skill only performs its own single job.

Inputs

  • Meta/TikTok/Google frequency and CPM trends
  • Shopify LTV cohort data

Method

  1. Pull the required inputs: Meta/TikTok/Google frequency and CPM trends; Shopify LTV cohort data.
  2. Track the two numbers most brands catch too late: how fast each creative is decaying, and whether CAC is drifting past LTV on any segment.
  3. Check the output against the brand's context files (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, aesthetic_core.md) so the result stays brand-specific rather than generic.
  4. Produce the output in the format the downstream skill expects: A fatigue score per live ad and a CAC:LTV ratio per segment, flagged when either crosses threshold.
  5. Log the handoff: Feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1), the Weekly Report (7.4) and Budget Allocation (2.4).

Decision rules

  • IF a required input is missing or stale → THEN flag the gap to the Marketing Orchestrator instead of estimating a placeholder value

Guardrails

  • Never hard-code brand context inside the skill; reference the Brain (voice_core.md, icp_core.md, product_core.md, matrix_core.md, aesthetic_core.md, format_core.md) via SessionStart.
  • Never treat ads shipped as the success metric; measure cost per shipped ad, operator hours saved, and blended ROAS lift week over week.
  • Never fabricate performance figures, channel data or customer language the supplied inputs do not contain.

Output

A fatigue score per live ad and a CAC:LTV ratio per segment, flagged when either crosses threshold.

Definition of done

  • Output matches the specified format and cadence.
  • Required inputs were present, or gaps were flagged rather than guessed.
  • Handoff target is named and, where one applies, the approval gate is respected: Feeds Kill/Scale Matrix (7.1), the Weekly Report (7.4) and Budget Allocation (2.4).
← Click to close
241

Short-Form Director

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
241

Short-Form Director

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Owns the department's charter and boundaries: what this system will and will not do, and enforces the ten approval gates across every other agent.

Use when

Once, to stand up the department, then on any change to scope or gates.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • The department brief and charter template
  • Business goals for TikTok, Reels and Shorts (installs, not impressions)

Method

  1. Write the charter: what the department plans, writes and structures, and what it never does (access accounts, contact creators, film, publish, or estimate ungiven results).
  2. Define the shared five-field record header every agent output must carry, so the next agent can read it without re-asking.
  3. Set the ten approval gates and mark which two are hard stops.
  4. Publish the charter as standing context every other agent reads before activation.

Decision rules

  • IF an agent's output has no record header → THEN reject it before it reaches the next agent
  • IF a proposed action falls outside the charter (contacting a creator, publishing, reading unsent results) → THEN refuse and name the boundary

Guardrails

  • Never let an agent claim an action the charter rules out: no accessing social accounts, no contacting creators, no filming, no publishing, no reading unsupplied performance data.
  • Never treat a lot of views as proof something worked; that conclusion is refused by design.
  • Never skip a hard-stop gate: nothing films before the creator-brief gate is signed, nothing goes live before the publish gate is signed.

Output

The department brief and charter, with the record header contract and the ten approval gates (two of them hard stops).

Definition of done

  • Charter distributed as standing context to every agent
  • Hard-stop gates identified and named
  • Record header contract defined
← Click to close
242

Product Evidence Analyst

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
242

Product Evidence Analyst

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Turn what the team already knows about the product into evidence rows other agents can cite by ID, instead of claims nobody can trace.

Use when

At department setup, and whenever new product evidence (surveys, data, docs) arrives.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • In-app survey data, analytics or design documents supplied by the team
  • The evidence-ledger template

Method

  1. Read every source document and extract discrete, checkable facts.
  2. Assign each fact an evidence ID (e.g. EVD-A02) and record its exact source and sample size where relevant.
  3. Reject any claim that cannot be traced to a specific document or dataset.
  4. Publish the evidence ledger for the Content Territory Strategist and Hook Strategist to cite.

Decision rules

  • IF a fact has no traceable source → THEN exclude it from the ledger rather than soften it into a maybe
  • IF a survey fact lacks a sample size → THEN record it as directional, not quantified

Guardrails

  • Never invent a statistic to fill a content gap.
  • Never let a fact enter the ledger without its evidence ID and source.
  • Never upgrade a directional finding into a quantified claim.

Output

An evidence ledger: one row per fact, each with an evidence ID, its source, and its sample size or caveat.

Definition of done

  • Every ledger row has a traceable source
  • Every row carries a unique evidence ID
  • No claim exceeds what its source supports
← Click to close
243

Audience Research Analyst

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
243

Audience Research Analyst

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Build the audience picture (objections, triggers, buyer language) the rest of the department writes to.

Use when

At department setup, and on a quarterly refresh.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Customer interviews, support tickets or survey data
  • The evidence ledger (2.2)

Method

  1. Extract recurring objections, triggers and the audience's own language from the supplied research.
  2. Cross-reference each finding against an evidence ID so it is not a generic persona guess.
  3. Rank findings by how often they recur across sources.
  4. Publish the audience record for the Content Territory Strategist and Hook Strategist.

Decision rules

  • IF an audience insight has no supporting evidence row → THEN flag it as an assumption, not a finding

Guardrails

  • Never write a persona from imagination when real research exists.
  • Never present a single respondent's comment as a majority pattern.

Output

An audience record: ranked objections, triggers and buyer language, each tied to an evidence ID.

Definition of done

  • Findings ranked by recurrence
  • Every finding cites an evidence ID or is labeled an assumption
← Click to close
244

Platform Context Analyst

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
244

Platform Context Analyst

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Maintain the standing TikTok, Reels and Shorts platform profiles (safe zones, caption limits, ranking signals) so every downstream agent designs for the real constraints of each surface.

Use when

At setup, and whenever a platform changes its spec.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Current platform documentation or observed spec changes for TikTok, Reels and Shorts

Method

  1. Record each platform's safe zone, on-screen text rules, opening-three-seconds convention, sound default, caption length and hashtag convention.
  2. Record what each platform's ranking algorithm is reported to reward.
  3. Flag any platform change since the last profile update.
  4. Publish the three platform records for the Platform Adaptation Agent and Hook Strategist.

Decision rules

  • IF a platform's spec has changed since the last profile → THEN version the record and flag every downstream asset built on the old spec

Guardrails

  • Never treat one platform's convention as portable to another.
  • Never publish a platform profile without a same-day source check when a change is suspected.

Output

Three platform records (TikTok, Reels, Shorts), each with safe zone, on-screen text, opening convention, sound default, caption limit and ranking signal.

Definition of done

  • All three platforms profiled
  • Changes since the last version flagged
  • Ranking signals recorded per platform
← Click to close
245

Trend Verification Agent

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
245

Trend Verification Agent

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Verify or refuse a trend claim before anything is built on it: a source is required, and there is no such thing as a trend without one.

Use when

Whenever a trend, sound or format claim is proposed as the basis for a concept.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • A trend claim and, if one exists, its source
  • An expiry window (7 days from verification)

Method

  1. Check whether the claim carries a specific source the requester actually looked at.
  2. If a source exists, record what it establishes, no more, and set a 7-day expiry.
  3. If no source exists, return REJECTED, no source supplied, and stop.
  4. Never describe or characterize the trend on the agent's own authority even when rejecting it.

Decision rules

  • IF no source is supplied → THEN return REJECTED, no source supplied, and stop, without describing the trend anyway
  • IF the verification is older than 7 days → THEN treat it as expired and require re-verification

Guardrails

  • Never assert that something is trending without a source the requester looked at themselves.
  • Never let a rejected trend claim quietly re-enter a concept under different wording.
  • Never extend a trend record past its 7-day expiry.

Output

A trend record (source, what it establishes, 7-day expiry) or a REJECTED verdict with no elaboration.

Definition of done

  • Source is named and dated
  • Expiry is set
  • Rejections state no source supplied and stop there
← Click to close
246

Content Territory Strategist

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
246

Content Territory Strategist

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Turn evidence and audience research into 3 to 6 content territories the department will actually build formats and concepts against.

Use when

After Workflow 1's inputs (charter, evidence, audience, platform records) are approved.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Evidence ledger (2.2)
  • Audience record (2.3)
  • Platform records (2.4)
  • Verified trend records where relevant (2.5)

Method

  1. Group evidence and audience findings into candidate territories.
  2. Cut candidates that cannot cite at least one evidence row.
  3. Rank the survivors by ICP fit and production feasibility.
  4. Publish 3 to 6 approved territories at gate G-C.

Decision rules

  • IF a candidate territory cannot cite an evidence row → THEN drop it before the approval gate

Guardrails

  • Never carry a territory into approval without at least one supporting evidence ID.
  • Never approve more territories than the team can actually produce against this cycle.

Output

3 to 6 approved content territories, each citing its supporting evidence.

Definition of done

  • Every territory cites evidence
  • Territory count is within production capacity
  • Approved at gate G-C
← Click to close
247

Recurring Format Designer

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
247

Recurring Format Designer

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Design repeatable formats, not one-off videos: a format is a show only if you can name what changes week to week, proven with a durability test.

Use when

After territories are approved, at the start of Workflow 2.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved content territories (2.6)
  • The 10-format library template with five variation axes each

Method

  1. Draft the format premise, length window and lead platform.
  2. Name the five variation axes that let the format run more than once.
  3. Run the durability test: write twelve episode premises against the axes and count how many hold up honestly.
  4. Report the actual number of durable episodes, even when it falls short of twelve.
  5. Publish the format to the library for the Hook Strategist and Opening Visual Designer.

Decision rules

  • IF the durability test returns fewer than twelve honest episodes → THEN report the real number rather than rounding up
  • IF a variation axis runs out of honest values → THEN retire that axis or the format, not paper over the gap

Guardrails

  • Never claim twelve durable episodes when the axis only supports fewer; report the true count.
  • Never ship a format with fewer than five named variation axes.

Output

A format definition: premise, length window, lead platform, five variation axes, and its durability-test result.

Definition of done

  • Five axes named
  • Durability test run and reported honestly
  • Format added to the library
← Click to close
248

Hook Strategist

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
248

Hook Strategist

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Write ten hooks per approved concept, each one attached to a concept and an evidence row, never a comparison the evidence cannot support.

Use when

After concepts are drafted, before Opening Visual Designer.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved concepts with their evidence IDs
  • The format's variation axes

Method

  1. Draft ten hook variants per concept using different opening mechanisms.
  2. Attach each hook to the concept's evidence ID.
  3. Cut any hook that implies a comparison, statistic or claim the evidence ledger does not support.
  4. Publish the hook bank for the Opening Visual Designer and Story Structure Agent.

Decision rules

  • IF a hook implies a claim (e.g. a comparison between users) with no supporting evidence row → THEN cut it rather than hedge it

Guardrails

  • Never let a hook outrun its evidence, even when it tests well.
  • Never publish fewer than ten hooks per concept without noting the shortfall and why.

Output

A hook bank: ten hooks per concept, each tagged to an evidence ID, scored and ranked.

Definition of done

  • Ten hooks per concept or the shortfall is explained
  • Every hook traces to an evidence ID
  • No hook implies unsupported comparisons
← Click to close
249

Opening Visual Designer

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
249

Opening Visual Designer

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Design the first three seconds for each platform's real viewing condition: sound-on for TikTok, silent-first for Reels, and an alternate opener for Shorts.

Use when

After hooks are approved.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved hook bank (3.2)
  • Platform records (2.4)

Method

  1. Design the TikTok opener assuming sound on.
  2. Design the Reels opener as on-screen text, since the first frame must work as a still.
  3. Design a distinct alternate opener (shot 6) for Shorts so its first frame differs from the other two.
  4. Publish the three opener designs to the Shot List Builder.

Decision rules

  • IF the same opener is proposed for more than one platform → THEN require a genuinely different treatment before approval

Guardrails

  • Never assume sound-on for Reels or Shorts.
  • Never reuse one opener across all three platforms; that fails the difference check downstream.

Output

Three platform-specific opener designs (TikTok sound-on, Reels on-screen text, Shorts alternate/shot 6).

Definition of done

  • Three distinct openers produced
  • Each matches its platform's real viewing condition
← Click to close
250

Story Structure Agent

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
250

Story Structure Agent

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Structure each concept into a coherent beat sequence from hook to product moment to close.

Use when

After the opener is designed, before shot listing.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved hook and opener
  • The format's premise and length window

Method

  1. Break the concept into beats: open, build, reveal, product moment, close.
  2. Fit the beats inside the format's length window.
  3. Flag any beat that requires an unverified trend claim and route it to the Trend Verification Agent.
  4. Publish the beat sequence to the Demonstration Planner and Shot List Builder.

Decision rules

  • IF a beat depends on an unverified trend → THEN hold it for Trend Verification before it proceeds

Guardrails

  • Never let runtime creep past the format's stated length window.
  • Never skip the product moment to chase a longer cold open.

Output

A beat sequence (open, build, reveal, product moment, close) fitted to the format's length window.

Definition of done

  • Beats fit the length window
  • Product moment present
  • Trend-dependent beats verified or removed
← Click to close
251

Demonstration Planner

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
251

Demonstration Planner

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Plan exactly what the product demonstration must show on camera to prove the concept's claim.

Use when

After the beat sequence is approved.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved beat sequence (3.4)
  • Evidence ledger entry the concept rests on

Method

  1. Identify the single job the demonstration must prove.
  2. Specify what must be visible on camera for that proof to read as genuine.
  3. Rule out demonstration choices that would overstate the evidence.
  4. Publish the demonstration spec to the Creator Brief Writer and Shot List Builder.

Decision rules

  • IF the demonstration would visually imply more than the evidence supports → THEN scale the demonstration back to what is provable

Guardrails

  • Never stage a demonstration that reads as proof of a claim the evidence ledger does not carry.

Output

A demonstration spec naming the one job shown and what must be visible for it to read as genuine.

Definition of done

  • One job named
  • Visible proof requirement stated
  • No overstatement of the underlying evidence
← Click to close
252

Creator Archetype Builder

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
252

Creator Archetype Builder

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Define creator archetypes as roles, not people, each with a never-ask list, rights posture and production capacity.

Use when

Before recruiting against a format or concept.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved formats and concepts
  • Platform records

Method

  1. Define the archetype's voice, delivery style and platform fit.
  2. Write a never-ask list at least four categories deep (no on-camera requirement forced, no forced product-name-first line, etc.).
  3. Record the archetype's rights posture and production capacity.
  4. Map each archetype to the brief it will receive, one to one.

Decision rules

  • IF a brief would violate the archetype's never-ask list → THEN the Creator Brief Writer must revise the brief, not the archetype

Guardrails

  • Never write an archetype as a real, named person.
  • Never omit the never-ask list; it is what keeps a brief from turning into a script.

Output

A creator archetype card: voice, delivery style, never-ask list, rights posture, capacity, mapped to its brief.

Definition of done

  • Never-ask list at least four categories
  • Archetype mapped one-to-one to a brief
  • Rights posture recorded
← Click to close
253

Creator Brief Writer

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
253

Creator Brief Writer

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Write briefs as constraints, not scripts: what has to be true, not what to say, and run every brief through the freedom pass before it ships.

Use when

After the archetype and demonstration spec are approved.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Creator archetype card (3.7)
  • Demonstration spec (3.6)
  • Approved hook and beats

Method

  1. Write what we're making and why this creator.
  2. State the one thing that has to be true, as a constraint, not a line of dialogue.
  3. Offer an optional opening the creator can use, change, or ignore.
  4. List what must be visible, what the creator can say however they like, and what must not be said, with the reason for each.
  5. Run the freedom pass: reject any line still in quote marks that nobody explicitly marked optional.

Decision rules

  • IF a section reads as an instruction rather than a constraint → THEN rewrite it before the brief reaches gate G-F
  • IF a claim in the brief has no evidence ID behind it → THEN cut the claim from what the creator can say

Guardrails

  • Never send a brief that reads as a script the creator is meant to recite.
  • Never let a brief cross gate G-F without the freedom pass.
  • Never include a claim the creator could not honestly defend if asked.

Output

A ten-section creator brief, forward-ready, that has passed the freedom pass.

Definition of done

  • Freedom pass completed
  • Every claim traces to an evidence ID
  • Approved at hard-stop gate G-F before anything is filmed
← Click to close
254

Shot List Builder

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
254

Shot List Builder

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Turn an approved brief into a shot list a crew or solo creator can actually execute, including the alternate opener and a coverage shot.

Use when

After the brief passes gate G-F.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved creator brief (3.8)
  • Opener designs (3.3)
  • Beat sequence (3.4)

Method

  1. List each shot in order with what must be true for it to count as captured.
  2. Include the alternate opener (shot 6) so the platform exports can genuinely differ.
  3. Include one coverage shot to protect the edit.
  4. Publish the shot list to the Production Planner.

Decision rules

  • IF a shot has no what-must-be-true condition → THEN add one before the list is sent to production

Guardrails

  • Never omit the alternate-opener shot; it is what makes three genuinely different platform exports possible.
  • Never send a shot list without a coverage shot.

Output

A shot list (around 7 shots per brief) including the alternate opener and one coverage shot, each with a what-must-be-true condition.

Definition of done

  • Alternate opener present
  • Coverage shot present
  • Every shot has a pass condition
← Click to close
255

Production Planner

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
255

Production Planner

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Build the production board against real capacity, and return a shorter board rather than an impossible one.

Use when

After shot lists are ready for a production cycle.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved shot lists (3.9)
  • Team capacity per department (shoot, edit)

Method

  1. List every planned item with its shoot window and delivery date.
  2. Check capacity per department against the board's total load.
  3. Cut the board to what capacity actually supports and name what is deferred.
  4. Publish the production board with its capacity check to the Distribution Planner.

Decision rules

  • IF the planned board exceeds a department's capacity → THEN shorten the board rather than schedule an impossible load

Guardrails

  • Never publish a production board that ignores the capacity check.
  • Never silently drop a deferred item without recording why.

Output

A production board with shoot windows, delivery dates, edit hours and a per-department capacity check.

Definition of done

  • Capacity check run and respected
  • Deferred items named
  • Board matches real team capacity
← Click to close
256

Platform Adaptation Agent

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
256

Platform Adaptation Agent

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Produce three genuinely different exports per asset, one per platform, and fail the asset if the three read the same.

Use when

After footage is delivered against the shot list.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Delivered footage
  • Shot list (3.9)
  • Platform records (2.4)

Method

  1. Cut a TikTok-native export: sound-on hook, top/bottom safe zones respected, no in-post link.
  2. Cut a Reels-native export: silent-first with on-screen hook text, end-card link only.
  3. Cut a Shorts-native export: alternate opener, searchable title carrying the hook, clickable description link.
  4. Run the difference check: opening three seconds, length in seconds and caption/title approach must all differ across the three.
  5. Fail and return the asset for rework if any two exports read the same.

Decision rules

  • IF two of the three exports share the same opening, length and caption approach → THEN fail the asset and send it back rather than publish a re-upload

Guardrails

  • Never treat a resize as an adaptation; a straight re-upload fails the difference check by design.
  • Never skip the alternate opener on the Shorts cut.

Output

Three platform-native exports per asset, each recorded on the Adaptation_Matrix with a pass or fail on the Difference_Check.

Definition of done

  • Three exports produced
  • Difference check passed on opening, length and caption approach
  • Failures returned for rework, not published
← Click to close
257

Distribution Planner

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
257

Distribution Planner

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Build the publish calendar and the per-slot checklist; a person still publishes, this agent never does.

Use when

After exports pass the platform-adaptation difference check.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Approved platform exports (4.1)
  • Target cadence per platform and department

Method

  1. Slot each approved export into the calendar at its platform's cadence.
  2. Attach a publish checklist to each slot (caption, hashtags, link placement, safe-zone check).
  3. Flag any slot missing an approved export rather than leaving it blank silently.
  4. Publish the calendar and checklists for a person to execute at gate G-H.

Decision rules

  • IF a calendar slot has no approved export behind it → THEN flag the gap instead of leaving an unexplained blank

Guardrails

  • Never post on the department's behalf; it produces the calendar and checklist only.
  • Never fill a slot with an export that failed the difference check.

Output

A distribution calendar (slots across weeks and platforms) plus a publish checklist per slot.

Definition of done

  • Every slot has an approved export or a flagged gap
  • Checklist attached per slot
  • Approved at hard-stop gate G-H before anything is published
← Click to close
258

Test Designer

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
258

Test Designer

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Design one-variable tests with the decision rule and sample-size threshold written before the test runs, never after.

Use when

Before a test cycle begins.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • A single variable to test (e.g. silent vs spoken opener)
  • Historical baseline performance

Method

  1. Define the single variable under test and hold every other factor constant.
  2. Write the decision rule and the minimum sample size threshold before any data comes in.
  3. Run the test and record actual results against both stated conditions.
  4. Rule the test inconclusive if either condition (the gap threshold or the sample size) is not met, even when the direction looks like a winner.

Decision rules

  • IF the result gap meets the threshold but the sample size does not → THEN the test is inconclusive and repeats next cycle, whatever the direction shows
  • IF a decision rule is written after the result is known → THEN discard the test; it does not count

Guardrails

  • Never adopt a directional result that fails its own pre-written threshold or sample-size rule.
  • Never write the decision rule after seeing the data.

Output

A test card: variable, decision rule, sample-size threshold, actual result, and a ruled verdict (adopted, rejected, or inconclusive).

Definition of done

  • Decision rule and threshold written before the test ran
  • Verdict follows the rule even when it disappoints
  • Inconclusive tests are queued for a re-run, not quietly dropped
← Click to close
259

Performance Evidence Analyst

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
259

Performance Evidence Analyst

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Turn the results a client actually pasted in, and nothing else, into derived metrics: hook rate, completion rate, installs per 1,000 views, by post and by platform.

Use when

Monthly, once the results tab is filled.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • The populated results-input tab (views, 3-second views, completions, saves, shares, link clicks, installs)

Method

  1. Sum the raw columns and derive the rate metrics (hook rate, completion rate, installs per 1,000 views) with the formula shown.
  2. Rank posts by the acquisition metric, not by raw views, and name the confound when the top and bottom of that ranking diverge.
  3. Break results out by platform and flag any metric confounded by a platform-only feature (e.g. a clickable link only one platform carries).
  4. State plainly what the data cannot answer, rather than inferring past it.

Decision rules

  • IF the biggest post by views is not the biggest post by installs-per-1000-views → THEN report both and do not treat views as the ranking
  • IF a platform difference could be explained by a feature only that platform has → THEN name the confound instead of crediting the platform

Guardrails

  • Never rank posts by views alone; views are reported, not the decision metric.
  • Never compute a metric from a column that was not supplied.
  • Never draw a platform conclusion without checking for a confounding feature.

Output

A results and derived-metrics report: cycle totals, per-post ranking by acquisition metric, and platform breakdown with confounds named.

Definition of done

  • Every figure recomputes from the supplied results tab
  • Views-based ranking never presented as the conclusion
  • Confounds stated, not resolved by assumption
← Click to close
260

Content Learning Director

Short-Form Video Short-Form Video Click to open →
260

Content Learning Director

Source: Short-Form Video

Purpose

Turn the month's results and test verdicts into next cycle's plan: what's kept, changed or retired, with keep/change/retire never applied on fewer than three posts.

Use when

Monthly, after the Performance Evidence Analyst and Test Designer report.

Not for

Work owned by the agent it hands off to or receives from — each agent performs one job in the fixed handoff order.

Inputs

  • Performance Evidence Analyst's report (7.1)
  • Test Designer's verdicts (7.2)
  • The prior monthly learning report

Method

  1. State three findings that could actually change next cycle's plan, each with its supporting figures.
  2. Apply keep, change or retire per format, only when at least three posts exist to judge it.
  3. Fold adopted test results into brief amendments for the next cycle.
  4. Write next cycle's plan and file it as the monthly learning report.

Decision rules

  • IF a format has fewer than three posts this cycle → THEN it cannot be retired yet, regardless of how it performed
  • IF a test was ruled inconclusive → THEN carry it into next cycle as a re-run, not as an adopted change

Guardrails

  • Never retire a format on fewer than three posts of evidence.
  • Never adopt an inconclusive test's direction as if it were a ruled result.
  • Never write a finding into the report that does not change any decision.

Output

A monthly learning report: three decision-relevant findings, keep/change/retire calls, adopted test results, and next cycle's plan.

Definition of done

  • Three findings, each tied to a decision
  • Keep/change/retire respects the three-post minimum
  • Inconclusive tests queued, not adopted
← Click to close
261

Full Site Audit (/seo audit)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin Click to open →
261

Full Site Audit (/seo audit)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin

Purpose

Run a full-site SEO audit by fanning out up to 15 parallel specialist sub-agents across technical, content, schema, GEO, local and e-commerce checks, and return one prioritized action plan.

Use when

Before a client engagement, a quarterly business review, or any time a second pair of eyes is needed before executives ask why organic traffic moved.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL or site
  • Whichever credential tier (0 to 3) is configured: PageSpeed/CrUX only, or with GSC, GA4 and Keyword Planner

Method

  1. Spawn parallel sub-agents per audit category (technical, content, schema, GEO, local, e-commerce) up to 15 at once.
  2. Score each finding 0 to 100 and attach the primary-source guidance it rests on.
  3. For every recommendation, state the first-principle observation, its dependencies, a falsifiability check ('how would we know this failed'), and a leading indicator.
  4. Consolidate into a single prioritized action plan, ranked by expected effect against effort.

Decision rules

  • IF a check requires a credential tier not configured → THEN report the check as skipped rather than estimate its result
  • IF two sub-agent findings conflict → THEN surface both with their evidence rather than silently picking one

Guardrails

  • Never present a recommendation without its falsifiability check and leading indicator.
  • Never claim a Core Web Vitals or ranking figure the configured credential tier could not have produced.
  • Never promise a ranking or traffic outcome; findings are diagnostic, not guarantees.

Output

A prioritized action plan (Markdown, PDF or JSON) with a 0-100 overall grade, critical issues, warnings and passed checks per category.

Definition of done

  • Every recommendation carries its falsifiability check and leading indicator
  • Skipped checks are disclosed, not silently omitted
  • Output ranked by effect versus effort
← Click to close
262

Technical SEO Audit (/seo technical)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #001 Click to open →
262

Technical SEO Audit (/seo technical)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #001 Crawl Budget Auditor (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Audit crawlability, indexation, rendering and Core Web Vitals across nine technical categories in one pass.

Use when

After a deploy, before a migration, or on a recurring weekly cadence to catch regressions between full audits.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL
  • CrUX/PageSpeed credentials (Tier 0 minimum)

Method

  1. Measure LCP, INP and CLS separately for mobile and desktop, using CrUX field data where available and Lighthouse as the lab-data fallback.
  2. Decompose LCP into TTFB, load delay, load duration and render delay when CrUX history is available, to localize the bottleneck.
  3. Check crawlability, indexation and rendering across the nine technical categories.
  4. Flag any finding that still references FID; the metric was removed from Chrome's field-data tools in September 2024 and must not appear.

Decision rules

  • IF field data (CrUX) is unavailable for the URL → THEN fall back to Lighthouse lab data and label it as such

Guardrails

  • Never report FID; INP replaced it and FID is no longer a supported metric.
  • Never blend mobile and desktop Core Web Vitals into a single number.
  • Never present lab data as field data without labeling the source.

Output

A technical SEO report: Core Web Vitals (mobile/desktop, field vs lab), LCP subpart breakdown where available, and findings across the nine categories.

Definition of done

  • INP used, not FID
  • Mobile and desktop reported separately
  • Data source (field or lab) labeled per metric
← Click to close
263

Content Brief Generator (/seo content-brief)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #052 Click to open →
263

Content Brief Generator (/seo content-brief)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #052 Content Brief Builder (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Generate a content brief for a target topic: target keywords, an outline, and internal-link recommendations, using live SERP and keyword data rather than a template.

Use when

Before a writer starts a new article or a content refresh.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target topic or keyword
  • SERP/keyword data source (Tier 0-3 credential set)

Method

  1. Pull the current SERP for the target topic and analyze ranking pages' structure.
  2. Derive target keywords and a question-based heading outline from that SERP.
  3. Recommend internal links from the site's existing content to and from the new piece.
  4. Score the draft brief for E-E-A-T signal coverage before handing it off.

Decision rules

  • IF the SERP shows no consistent pattern across top results → THEN flag the topic as ambiguous rather than force an outline

Guardrails

  • Never fabricate search volume or ranking-difficulty figures the connected API did not return.
  • Never recommend an internal link to a page that does not exist on the site.

Output

A content brief: target keywords, question-based outline, internal-link recommendations, and an E-E-A-T checklist.

Definition of done

  • Outline grounded in a live SERP pull
  • Internal links verified to exist
  • E-E-A-T checklist attached
← Click to close
264

Schema Markup Auditor (/seo schema)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #022 Click to open →
264

Schema Markup Auditor (/seo schema)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #022 Structured Data Validity Auditor (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Detect, validate and generate Schema.org JSON-LD markup, and flag deprecated types before they cost a rich result.

Use when

Before shipping new page templates, or whenever a rich-result eligibility drops.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL
  • Current page HTML/JSON-LD

Method

  1. Detect existing JSON-LD, Microdata and RDFa blocks and identify their schema types.
  2. Validate required and recommended properties against the current Schema.org spec.
  3. Flag deprecated types by name (HowTo, SpecialAnnouncement, ClaimReview, VehicleListing, EstimatedSalary, LearningVideo, the CourseInfo carousel) and note FAQPage no longer earns a Google rich result as of May 2026.
  4. Generate corrected or missing JSON-LD in the preferred format.

Decision rules

  • IF a detected type is deprecated → THEN name the retirement date and the replacement guidance rather than just flagging it as an error
  • IF FAQPage is present → THEN note it is valid schema but earns no Google rich-result benefit

Guardrails

  • Never recommend a deprecated schema type for its former rich-result benefit.
  • Never generate JSON-LD with required properties missing.
  • Never present Microdata or RDFa as the preferred format; JSON-LD is Google's stated preference.

Output

A schema report: detected blocks and types, critical issues, warnings, passed checks, an overall grade, and corrected JSON-LD.

Definition of done

  • Deprecated types named with their retirement date
  • Required properties validated
  • Corrected JSON-LD provided
← Click to close
265

AI Search / GEO Optimizer (/seo geo)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #160 Click to open →
265

AI Search / GEO Optimizer (/seo geo)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #160 AI Visibility Scorecard (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Score a page's readiness for AI Overviews, AI Mode and answer engines: passage citability, question-based headings, attribution density and entity presence.

Use when

When AI Overview or AI-citation visibility needs to be assessed or improved for a page.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL
  • Page content

Method

  1. Score passage citability against the 134 to 167 word self-contained answer-block benchmark.
  2. Check question-based heading hierarchy and attribution density.
  3. Check structured-data coverage and entity presence across Wikipedia, Reddit, YouTube and LinkedIn.
  4. Evidence-check the page against three common myths: llms.txt is not currently a citation lever, chunking is not required, and AI-specific keyword rewriting is unnecessary.

Decision rules

  • IF a recommendation rests on the llms.txt-as-citation-lever myth → THEN cite the primary-source evidence against it instead of following the myth

Guardrails

  • Never claim llms.txt influences AI citation without the primary-source evidence.
  • Never treat AEO or GEO as a discipline separate from SEO; Google's own guidance frames both as SEO under a new name.
  • Never score a page eligible for an AI feature if it is not indexed and snippet-eligible in classic Search first.

Output

A GEO readiness report: citability score, heading/attribution analysis, structured-data and entity coverage, myths addressed with evidence.

Definition of done

  • Citability scored against the word-count benchmark
  • Indexation/snippet-eligibility checked before AI-feature eligibility is claimed
  • Myths addressed with primary-source citations
← Click to close
266

XML Sitemap Analyzer/Generator (/seo sitemap)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #003 Click to open →
266

XML Sitemap Analyzer/Generator (/seo sitemap)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #003 XML Sitemap Architect (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Analyze an existing sitemap for coverage problems or generate a new one from a crawl.

Use when

When sitemaps are missing, stale, or suspected of carrying non-indexable URLs.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL or existing sitemap file
  • Site crawl (for generation mode)

Method

  1. In analyze mode, parse the existing sitemap and cross-check every URL against its live status and indexability.
  2. In generate mode, crawl the site and apply the inclusion rule (canonical, 200, indexable) before adding a URL.
  3. Flag any non-qualifying URL currently included, and any qualifying URL currently missing.
  4. Output the sitemap file(s) plus a coverage discrepancy list.

Decision rules

  • IF a URL in the sitemap 404s, redirects, or is noindexed → THEN flag it for removal rather than leave it

Guardrails

  • Never include a redirected, canonicalized or noindexed URL in a generated sitemap.
  • Never generate a lastmod value that does not correspond to an actual content change.

Output

An updated sitemap file (or files) plus a coverage discrepancy report.

Definition of done

  • Every included URL passes the inclusion rule
  • Discrepancies (missing or wrongly included URLs) listed
  • Lastmod tied to real changes only
← Click to close
267

Image SEO Analyzer (/seo images)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #083 Click to open →
267

Image SEO Analyzer (/seo images)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #083 Image & Media SEO Reviewer (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Audit image optimization across a page or site: alt text, file weight, format and lazy-loading behavior.

Use when

During a technical audit, or when Core Web Vitals flag large image payloads.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL
  • Page or site image inventory

Method

  1. Check every image for descriptive alt text and flag decorative images missing an empty alt.
  2. Check file size, format (WebP/AVIF vs legacy) and responsive srcset usage.
  3. Check lazy-loading is applied below the fold and not applied to the LCP image.
  4. Rank fixes by expected Core Web Vitals or accessibility impact.

Decision rules

  • IF the LCP element is an image with lazy-loading applied → THEN flag it as a Core Web Vitals regression, since the LCP image should load eagerly

Guardrails

  • Never recommend lazy-loading for the page's LCP image.
  • Never treat a missing alt attribute on a genuinely decorative image the same as a missing alt on an informative one.

Output

An image SEO report: alt-text gaps, format/weight issues, lazy-load misconfigurations, ranked by impact.

Definition of done

  • LCP image checked for eager loading
  • Alt text gaps distinguished decorative vs informative
  • Fixes ranked by impact
← Click to close
268

Competitor Comparison Page Generator (/seo competitor-pages)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #062 Click to open →
268

Competitor Comparison Page Generator (/seo competitor-pages)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #062 Comparison Page Builder (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Generate competitor-comparison page structures and content plans from live competitive analysis.

Use when

When building a comparison or alternatives page against a named competitor.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target competitor name or URL
  • Own product feature set

Method

  1. Pull the competitor's public feature set, pricing tiers and positioning.
  2. Map features side by side against the requesting site's own product.
  3. Draft a comparison page structure: table, narrative sections, and objection handling.
  4. Flag any comparison claim that cannot be verified from public competitor information.

Decision rules

  • IF a competitor claim cannot be verified from a public source → THEN mark it unverified rather than assert it as fact

Guardrails

  • Never assert a competitor's pricing or feature claim without a public source.
  • Never write a comparison page that omits a category where the competitor is genuinely stronger.

Output

A comparison-page content plan: feature table, narrative structure, and a verified-vs-unverified claim list.

Definition of done

  • Every competitor claim sourced or marked unverified
  • Weaker categories not omitted
  • Structure ready for a writer to draft from
← Click to close
269

Local SEO Auditor (/seo local)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #135 Click to open →
269

Local SEO Auditor (/seo local)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #135 Business Profile Auditor (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Audit Google Business Profile signals, NAP citation consistency, and review intelligence across one or more locations.

Use when

For any business with a physical location or service area, on a recurring cadence.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Google Business Profile access or export
  • Citation directory listings
  • Review data

Method

  1. Audit GBP categories, hours, photos, posts, products and attributes.
  2. Check NAP (name, address, phone) consistency across major citation directories and flag deviations.
  3. Analyze review rating trends, sentiment and response coverage.
  4. For multi-location businesses, apply the 30-page warning threshold and 50-page hard stop against doorway-page violations.

Decision rules

  • IF a multi-location build exceeds 50 near-duplicate location pages → THEN hard-stop and flag doorway-page risk
  • IF a directory listing's NAP deviates from the canonical record → THEN flag it for correction, do not average the two

Guardrails

  • Never let a multi-location rollout cross the 50-page hard stop without flagging doorway-page risk.
  • Never treat a NAP deviation as acceptable because the difference is minor; flag every deviation.

Output

A local SEO report: GBP signal audit, NAP consistency table, review-intelligence summary, and doorway-page risk status.

Definition of done

  • NAP checked across all major directories
  • Doorway-page thresholds enforced
  • Review trends and response coverage reported
← Click to close
270

Maps Intelligence (/seo maps)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #148 Click to open →
270

Maps Intelligence (/seo maps)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #148 Map Pack Visibility Reviewer (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Run geo-grid rank tracking, Google Business Profile audits, review analysis and competitor radius mapping for map-pack visibility.

Use when

When map-pack ranking needs to be tracked or diagnosed against named local competitors.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Business location(s)
  • Named local competitors
  • Geo-grid tracking configuration

Method

  1. Run geo-grid rank checks across the configured radius and grid density.
  2. Audit the GBP profile for completeness against category norms.
  3. Map named competitors' map-pack presence across the same grid.
  4. Flag any deprecated GBP feature reference (retired chat fields, .business.site URLs).

Decision rules

  • IF the profile references a retired GBP feature (chat field, .business.site URL) → THEN flag it as a deprecation risk

Guardrails

  • Never report map-pack rank from a single query point; use the full geo-grid.
  • Never recommend a GBP feature Google has since retired.

Output

A maps intelligence report: geo-grid rank map, GBP completeness audit, competitor radius comparison, deprecation flags.

Definition of done

  • Geo-grid covers the configured radius, not a single point
  • Competitors mapped on the same grid
  • Deprecated GBP features flagged
← Click to close
271

Hreflang / i18n Auditor (/seo hreflang)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #021 Click to open →
271

Hreflang / i18n Auditor (/seo hreflang)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #021 Hreflang Consistency Checker (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Audit and generate hreflang annotations for international and multilingual sites.

Use when

Before or after an international expansion, or when cross-market cannibalization is suspected.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Site URL set across target locales
  • Locale/market list

Method

  1. Parse existing hreflang annotations and check for reciprocity (every pair must reference each other).
  2. Check for a self-referencing hreflang tag on every localized page.
  3. Flag missing x-default and locale-code errors (language vs language-region confusion).
  4. Generate corrected hreflang annotations for the full locale set.

Decision rules

  • IF a hreflang pair is not reciprocal → THEN flag both URLs, since a one-directional tag is invalid

Guardrails

  • Never generate hreflang without a self-referencing tag on each page.
  • Never confuse a language code with a language-region code when generating annotations.

Output

An hreflang audit report (reciprocity gaps, missing self-references, code errors) and corrected annotations.

Definition of done

  • Every pair checked for reciprocity
  • Self-reference present on every localized URL
  • x-default reviewed
← Click to close
272

Google Search Console & Analytics Suite (/seo google)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #181 Click to open →
272

Google Search Console & Analytics Suite (/seo google)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #181 Search Console Decline Monitor (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Pull and interpret Search Console queries, URL Inspection and sitemap status, GA4 organic traffic, and PageSpeed/CrUX data through a tiered credential system, and generate PDF reports.

Use when

For recurring performance reporting once Google API credentials are configured.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Google API credentials at the configured tier (0 to 3)
  • Reporting period

Method

  1. Pull Search Console queries, impressions, clicks and position data for the period.
  2. Cross-reference with GA4 organic traffic, landing pages and device/country breakdown where Tier 2 is configured.
  3. Pull Keyword Planner volume and competition data where Tier 3 is configured.
  4. Render the findings as a PDF report (WeasyPrint, A4 layout) with charts.

Decision rules

  • IF a requested breakdown needs a credential tier not configured → THEN state which tier unlocks it rather than approximate the data

Guardrails

  • Never blend Search Console and GA4 attribution as if they measure the same thing.
  • Never store API credentials anywhere but the local, permission-restricted credential path.

Output

A performance report (Markdown + PDF + charts) built from whichever credential tier is configured, naming what higher tiers would add.

Definition of done

  • Report scoped to the configured tier
  • Missing-tier data named as unavailable, not estimated
  • PDF generated with charts
← Click to close
273

Backlink Profile Analyzer (/seo backlinks)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #113 Click to open →
273

Backlink Profile Analyzer (/seo backlinks)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #113 Backlink Gap Analyzer (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Analyze a backlink profile using Moz, Bing Webmaster and Common Crawl data sources.

Use when

Before a link-building push, or when a ranking drop is suspected to be link-related.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target domain
  • Moz/Bing/Common Crawl API access where configured

Method

  1. Pull the backlink profile from whichever configured sources are available.
  2. Segment links by authority, anchor-text pattern and follow/nofollow status.
  3. Flag sudden link-velocity changes or toxic-pattern clusters.
  4. Cross-check flagged toxic links before recommending any disavow action.

Decision rules

  • IF a link-velocity spike coincides with a ranking change → THEN report the correlation without asserting causation

Guardrails

  • Never recommend a disavow action without a documented toxic-pattern review.
  • Never present correlation between a link spike and a ranking move as proven causation.

Output

A backlink profile report: authority and anchor-text segmentation, velocity trend, and a reviewed toxic-link list.

Definition of done

  • Sources used are named
  • Toxic links reviewed before any disavow recommendation
  • Correlation vs causation stated plainly
← Click to close
274

SERP Semantic Clustering (/seo cluster)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #027 Click to open →
274

SERP Semantic Clustering (/seo cluster)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #027 Query Cluster Builder (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Cluster keywords by actual SERP overlap rather than surface-level string similarity.

Use when

When planning a content architecture or checking for cannibalization risk across a keyword set.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Keyword list
  • Live SERP data for each keyword

Method

  1. Pull the current SERP for every keyword in the set.
  2. Cluster keywords whose top-10 results overlap above the configured threshold.
  3. Flag keyword pairs that cluster despite different surface wording, and vice versa.
  4. Output a cluster map with one recommended page per cluster.

Decision rules

  • IF two keywords share fewer than the threshold number of overlapping URLs → THEN keep them in separate clusters even if the strings look similar

Guardrails

  • Never cluster keywords on string similarity alone without checking SERP overlap.
  • Never recommend more than one page per genuine SERP cluster; that manufactures cannibalization.

Output

A SERP-based cluster map: one recommended page per cluster, with the overlap evidence behind each grouping.

Definition of done

  • Clusters based on live SERP overlap, not string matching
  • Overlap threshold stated
  • One page recommended per cluster
← Click to close
275

Search Experience Optimization Planner (/seo sxo)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin Click to open →
275

Search Experience Optimization Planner (/seo sxo)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin

Purpose

Plan around page-type, user stories and personas rather than keywords alone, treating the page as an experience to be completed, not just ranked.

Use when

When a page is ranking but not converting, or during new page-type planning.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target page or page type
  • Available user research or personas

Method

  1. Classify the page type and the user story it needs to complete.
  2. Map the persona's likely state of mind and objections on arrival.
  3. Identify where the page's structure fails to complete the user's story even if it satisfies the keyword.
  4. Recommend structural changes tied to the user story, not to additional keyword coverage.

Decision rules

  • IF a page ranks well but the user story is not completed → THEN prioritize structural fixes over further keyword optimization

Guardrails

  • Never treat ranking position as evidence the user story is being completed.
  • Never recommend a structural change with no stated user story behind it.

Output

An SXO plan: page-type classification, persona and user-story mapping, and structural recommendations tied to story completion.

Definition of done

  • User story stated explicitly per page type
  • Structural recommendations tied to the story, not just keywords
  • Ranking and story-completion treated as separate questions
← Click to close
276

SEO Drift Monitor (/seo drift)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin ⇄ vs #195 Click to open →
276

SEO Drift Monitor (/seo drift)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin · Compare with #195 Anomaly Detection Protocol (Klaym AI library)

Purpose

Take SQLite-backed baseline snapshots of a site's SEO state and compare later runs against them to catch regressions between full audits.

Use when

After a baseline audit, then on a recurring cadence or after any deploy.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Target URL
  • Prior baseline snapshot (if one exists)

Method

  1. Take a full-state snapshot (technical, content, schema signals) and store it.
  2. On a later run, diff the new snapshot against the stored baseline.
  3. Flag every regression by category and severity, not just an aggregate score change.
  4. Store the new snapshot as the baseline once reviewed.

Decision rules

  • IF no baseline snapshot exists yet → THEN take one and report drift starting from the next run, not this one

Guardrails

  • Never report an aggregate score change without naming which underlying signals moved.
  • Never overwrite a baseline automatically without the run being reviewed.

Output

A drift report: baseline vs current snapshot diff, regressions by category and severity, and history stored in SQLite.

Definition of done

  • Baseline exists or is created explicitly
  • Regressions attributed to specific signals
  • History retained for trend review
← Click to close
277

E-commerce & Marketplace SEO (/seo ecommerce)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin Click to open →
277

E-commerce & Marketplace SEO (/seo ecommerce)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin

Purpose

Analyze e-commerce-specific SEO and marketplace intelligence: category structure, faceted navigation, product-schema coverage and marketplace listing signals.

Use when

For online stores, before a catalog restructure or a marketplace-channel expansion.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • Store URL
  • Product/category export where available

Method

  1. Audit category and faceted-navigation structure for crawl and duplicate-content risk.
  2. Check product-page schema coverage (Product, Offer, AggregateRating) against required properties.
  3. Check out-of-stock and discontinued-product handling for index bloat.
  4. Assess marketplace listing signals where the store also sells on third-party marketplaces.

Decision rules

  • IF an out-of-stock product page is left indexable indefinitely → THEN flag it for a handling decision (noindex, redirect, or restock ETA)

Guardrails

  • Never leave discontinued-product pages indexed without an explicit handling decision.
  • Never recommend blocking faceted URLs that carry unique, valuable, ranking content.

Output

An e-commerce SEO report: category/facet structure risk, product-schema coverage, stock-status handling, and marketplace signal notes.

Definition of done

  • Facet risk assessed for crawl/duplication, not blocked wholesale
  • Product schema checked against required properties
  • Stock-status handling decision made explicit
← Click to close
278

FLOW Framework Prompts (/seo flow)

Claude SEO Plugin Claude SEO Plugin Click to open →
278

FLOW Framework Prompts (/seo flow)

Source: Claude SEO Plugin

Purpose

Run the FLOW framework's evidence-led prompt sequence (openly licensed CC BY 4.0) for a given stage of SEO work, keeping every step tied to stated evidence.

Use when

When a team wants a structured, evidence-led prompt sequence for a specific SEO stage rather than a single audit command.

Not for

Live crawling, API calls or code execution — this card documents the command's behavior for comparison; running it requires the actual claude-seo plugin installed in Claude Code.

Inputs

  • The FLOW stage to run
  • Supporting evidence for that stage

Method

  1. Select the FLOW stage requested.
  2. Run its prompt sequence, requiring stated evidence at each step rather than assumption.
  3. Surface any step where evidence is missing rather than filling the gap.
  4. Attribute the framework per its CC BY 4.0 license in the output.

Decision rules

  • IF a FLOW step has no supporting evidence supplied → THEN surface the gap instead of completing the step on assumption

Guardrails

  • Never complete a FLOW step on assumption when evidence was not supplied.
  • Never drop the CC BY 4.0 attribution from output that uses the framework.

Output

Stage output from the FLOW sequence, with evidence cited per step and the CC BY 4.0 attribution intact.

Definition of done

  • Evidence cited per step or the gap surfaced
  • Attribution retained
  • Correct stage run
← Click to close
279

ADHD-Shaped Output Style

Output Style Output Style Click to open →
279

ADHD-Shaped Output Style

Source: Output Style

Purpose

Reshapes every response, not just this one, so an ADHD reader can act on it: lead with the next action, number multi-step work, restate state across turns, suppress tangents, give concrete time estimates, and make finished work visible.

Use when

Invoked with /i-have-adhd (or activated as a standing output style); stays on for the rest of the session until the reader says "stop adhd mode" or "normal mode".

Not for

A single reply the reader wants explained in full ('explain', 'walk me through') — those get a full-length body with headers, still with no preamble or closing pleasantries.

Inputs

  • The reader's request
  • Prior turn's step/progress state, if the work spans multiple turns
  • Whether a destructive action, a debug spiral, or real ambiguity is present

Method

  1. Open with the action itself (a command, a path, a snippet) before any prose.
  2. If the work takes more than one step, number it, keep each step to one bounded action, and cut or fold in any step the reader does not need.
  3. Restate multi-turn state at the top of every turn (e.g. 'Step 3 of 5 done'); use the harness's task/plan tool for the checklist itself rather than narrating it in prose.
  4. Suppress secondary issues: finish the first thing, then offer a second issue as a separate question rather than folding it in.
  5. Close with exactly one concrete action the reader can take in under two minutes, and nothing else.

Decision rules

  • IF a destructive action is ahead (rm -rf, force push, schema migration, dropping a table) → THEN confirm before acting; safety overrides brevity
  • IF the last three turns were all 'still broken' → THEN stop iterating on code, name the assumption that might be wrong, and ask one diagnostic question
  • IF the request is genuinely ambiguous → THEN ask one short clarifying question rather than guess and rewrite
  • IF a rule would delete the answer itself (e.g. 'what are my options') → THEN keep 2 to 4 ranked options with one-line trade-offs and a recommendation first; the task wins over the rule's shape
  • IF the harness requires announcing a tool call or otherwise conflicts with this style → THEN the harness's system prompt outranks this skill; keep the shape, not the letter, of the rule

Guardrails

  • Never open with an announcement of what you're about to do ('Let me...', 'I'll...', 'Great question').
  • Never close with a recap of what was just done or a pleasantry ('Hope this helps', 'Let me know if you need anything else').
  • Never bury a second issue inside the first fix; surface it once, at the end, as its own question.
  • Never give a vague time estimate ('this will take some work'); use concrete units and a range tied to a stated condition.
  • Never soften an error with 'Uh oh' or 'There seems to be a problem'; state the cause and the fix directly.
  • Never let list formatting override completeness: cap the visible list at five items but retain every relevant item internally for when the reader asks or needs them.

Output

Every response in the session reshaped per the rules above: action-first, numbered where multi-step, state restated, one next action at the close, until the reader turns the style off.

Definition of done

  • Reading only the first and last line tells the reader what to do next and what just happened.
  • No forbidden opener, recap, or closing pleasantry survived the pre-send check.
  • Any hedge left in the text carries real uncertainty rather than reflexive softening.
← Click to close

Want this built for your business

Skills are the easy part. Wiring them together is the work.

This library shows the shape of the system. Turning it into a working, running operation for your own site or brand, with your own context, approvals and cadence, is what PJM Studios does.